PowerPC Improve support for Gekko & Broadway
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset H8/300
44 @set H8
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset SH
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset HPPA
50 @set abnormal-separator
51 @end ifset
52 @c ------------
53 @ifset GENERIC
54 @settitle Using @value{AS}
55 @end ifset
56 @ifclear GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
58 @end ifclear
59 @setchapternewpage odd
60 @c %**end of header
61
62 @c @smallbook
63 @c @set SMALL
64 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
65 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
66 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
67 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
68 @c
69 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
70 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
71 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
72 @c break.
73 @c
74 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
75 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
76 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
77 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
78 @c discretion, of course.
79 @ifinfo
80 @set SMALL
81 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
82 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
83 @end ifinfo
84
85 @ifnottex
86 @dircategory Software development
87 @direntry
88 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
89 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
90 @end direntry
91 @end ifnottex
92
93 @finalout
94 @syncodeindex ky cp
95
96 @copying
97 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
98
99 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
100 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
101
102 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
103 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
104 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
105 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
106 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
107 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
108
109 @c man end
110 @end copying
111
112 @titlepage
113 @title Using @value{AS}
114 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
115 @ifclear GENERIC
116 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
117 @end ifclear
118 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
119 @sp 1
120 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
121 @end ifset
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
124 @sp 1
125 @sp 13
126 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
127 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
128 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
129 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
130 distracting the boss while they got some work
131 done.
132 @sp 3
133 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
134 @page
135 @tex
136 {\parskip=0pt
137 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
138 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
139 }
140 %"boxit" macro for figures:
141 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
142 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
143 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
144 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
145 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
146 @end tex
147
148 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
149 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
150
151 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
152 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
153 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
154 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
155 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
156 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
157
158 @end titlepage
159 @contents
160
161 @ifnottex
162 @node Top
163 @top Using @value{AS}
164
165 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
166 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
167 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
168 @end ifset
169 version @value{VERSION}.
170 @ifclear GENERIC
171 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
172 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
173 @end ifclear
174
175 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
176 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
177 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
178
179 @menu
180 * Overview:: Overview
181 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
182 * Syntax:: Syntax
183 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
184 * Symbols:: Symbols
185 * Expressions:: Expressions
186 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
187 @ifset ELF
188 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
189 @end ifset
190 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
191 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
192 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
193 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
194 * AS Index:: AS Index
195 @end menu
196 @end ifnottex
197
198 @node Overview
199 @chapter Overview
200 @iftex
201 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
202 @ifclear GENERIC
203 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
204 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
205 @end ifclear
206 @end iftex
207
208 @cindex invocation summary
209 @cindex option summary
210 @cindex summary of options
211 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
212 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
213
214 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
215
216 @ignore
217 @c man begin SEEALSO
218 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
219 @c man end
220 @end ignore
221
222 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
223 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
224 @smallexample
225 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
226 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
227 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
228 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
229 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
230 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
231 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
232 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
233 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
234 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
235 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
236 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
237 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
238 [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
240 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
241 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
242 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
243 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
244 [@b{--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]}]
245 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
246 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
247 @c
248 @c man end
249 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
250 @c Add an empty line for separation.
251 @c man begin TARGET
252 @ifset AARCH64
253
254 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
255 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
256 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
257 @end ifset
258 @ifset ALPHA
259
260 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
261 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
262 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
263 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
264 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
265 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
266 @end ifset
267 @ifset ARC
268
269 @emph{Target ARC options:}
270 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
271 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
272 [@b{-mcode-density}]
273 [@b{-mrelax}]
274 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
275 @end ifset
276 @ifset ARM
277
278 @emph{Target ARM options:}
279 @c Don't document the deprecated options
280 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
281 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
282 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
283 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
284 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
285 [@b{-mthumb}]
286 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
287 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
288 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
289 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset Blackfin
292
293 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
294 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
295 [@b{-mfdpic}]
296 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
297 [@b{-mnopic}]
298 @end ifset
299 @ifset CRIS
300
301 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
302 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
303 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
304 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
305 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
306 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
307 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
308 @end ifset
309 @ifset D10V
310
311 @emph{Target D10V options:}
312 [@b{-O}]
313 @end ifset
314 @ifset D30V
315
316 @emph{Target D30V options:}
317 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
318 @end ifset
319 @ifset EPIPHANY
320
321 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
322 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset H8
325
326 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
327 [-h-tick-hex]
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset HPPA
330 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
331 @end ifset
332 @ifset I80386
333
334 @emph{Target i386 options:}
335 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
336 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
403 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
404 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
405 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
406 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
407 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
408 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
409 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
410 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
411 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
412 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
413 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
414 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
415 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
416 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
417 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
418 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
419 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
420 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
421 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
422 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
423 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
424 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
425 [@b{-mcrc}] [@b{-mno-crc}]
426 [@b{-mginv}] [@b{-mno-ginv}]
427 [@b{-mloongson-mmi}] [@b{-mno-loongson-mmi}]
428 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
429 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
430 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
431 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
432 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
433 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
434 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset MMIX
437
438 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
439 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
440 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
441 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
442 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
443 @end ifset
444 @ifset NIOSII
445
446 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
447 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
448 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
449 @end ifset
450 @ifset NDS32
451
452 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
453 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
454 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
455 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
456 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
457 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
458 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
459 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
460 [@b{-mb2bb}]
461 @end ifset
462 @ifset PDP11
463
464 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
465 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
466 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
467 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
468 @end ifset
469 @ifset PJ
470
471 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
472 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset PPC
475
476 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
477 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
478 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
479 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mgekko}|
480 @b{-mbroadway}|@b{-mppc64}|@b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|
481 @b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|
482 @b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|@b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
483 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
484 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
485 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
486 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
487 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
488 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
489 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
490 @end ifset
491 @ifset PRU
492
493 @emph{Target PRU options:}
494 [@b{-link-relax}]
495 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
496 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
497 @end ifset
498 @ifset RISCV
499
500 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
501 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
502 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
503 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
504 @end ifset
505 @ifset RL78
506
507 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
508 [@b{-mg10}]
509 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
510 @end ifset
511 @ifset RX
512
513 @emph{Target RX options:}
514 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
515 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
516 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
517 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
518 [@b{-mpid}]
519 [@b{-mrelax}]
520 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
521 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
522 @end ifset
523 @ifset S390
524
525 @emph{Target s390 options:}
526 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
527 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
528 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
529 @end ifset
530 @ifset SCORE
531
532 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
533 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
534 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
535 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
536 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
537 @end ifset
538 @ifset SPARC
539
540 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
541 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
542 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
543 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
544 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
545 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
546 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
547 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
548 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
549 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
550 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
551 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
552 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
553 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
554 @b{-bump}]
555 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
556 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
557 @end ifset
558 @ifset TIC54X
559
560 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
561 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
562 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
563 @end ifset
564 @ifset TIC6X
565
566 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
567 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
568 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
569 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
570 @end ifset
571 @ifset TILEGX
572
573 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
574 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
575 @end ifset
576 @ifset TILEPRO
577 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
578 @end ifset
579 @ifset VISIUM
580
581 @emph{Target Visium options:}
582 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
583 @end ifset
584 @ifset XTENSA
585
586 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
587 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
588 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
589 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
590 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
591 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
592 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
593 @end ifset
594 @ifset Z80
595
596 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
597 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
598 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
599 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
600 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
601 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
602 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
603 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
604 @end ifset
605 @ifset Z8000
606
607 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
608 @end ifset
609
610 @c man end
611 @end smallexample
612
613 @c man begin OPTIONS
614
615 @table @gcctabopt
616 @include at-file.texi
617
618 @item -a[cdghlmns]
619 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
620
621 @table @gcctabopt
622 @item -ac
623 omit false conditionals
624
625 @item -ad
626 omit debugging directives
627
628 @item -ag
629 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
630
631 @item -ah
632 include high-level source
633
634 @item -al
635 include assembly
636
637 @item -am
638 include macro expansions
639
640 @item -an
641 omit forms processing
642
643 @item -as
644 include symbols
645
646 @item =file
647 set the name of the listing file
648 @end table
649
650 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
651 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
652 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
653
654 @item --alternate
655 Begin in alternate macro mode.
656 @ifclear man
657 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
658 @end ifclear
659
660 @item --compress-debug-sections
661 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
662 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
663 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
664 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
665
666 @ifset ELF
667 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
668 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
669 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
670 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
671 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
672 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
673 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
674 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
675 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
676 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
677 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
678 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
679 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
680 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
681 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
682
683 @end ifset
684
685 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
686 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
687 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
688 override this.
689
690 @item -D
691 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
692 other assemblers.
693
694 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
695 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
696 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
697
698 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
699 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
700 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
701 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
702 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
703 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
704
705 @item -f
706 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
707 compiler output).
708
709 @item -g
710 @itemx --gen-debug
711 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
712 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
713 ECOFF or DWARF2.
714
715 @item --gstabs
716 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
717 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
718
719 @item --gstabs+
720 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
721 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
722 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
723 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
724 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
725
726 @item --gdwarf-2
727 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
728 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
729 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
730
731 @item --gdwarf-sections
732 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
733 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
734 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
735 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
736 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
737 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
738 suffix.
739
740 @ifset ELF
741 @item --size-check=error
742 @itemx --size-check=warning
743 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
744
745 @item --elf-stt-common=no
746 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
747 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
748 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
749 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
750
751 @item --generate-missing-build-notes=yes
752 @itemx --generate-missing-build-notes=no
753 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build
754 attribute notes if none are present in the input sources.
755 The default can be controlled by the @option{--enable-generate-build-notes}
756 configure option.
757
758 @end ifset
759
760 @item --help
761 Print a summary of the command-line options and exit.
762
763 @item --target-help
764 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
765
766 @item -I @var{dir}
767 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
768
769 @item -J
770 Don't warn about signed overflow.
771
772 @item -K
773 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
774 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
775 @end ifclear
776 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
777 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
778 @end ifset
779
780 @item -L
781 @itemx --keep-locals
782 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
783 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
784 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
785 @ifclear man
786 @xref{Symbol Names}.
787 @end ifclear
788
789 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
790 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
791 listing to @var{number}.
792
793 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
794 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
795 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
796
797 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
798 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
799 @var{number} bytes.
800
801 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
802 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
803 to @var{number} + 1.
804
805 @item --no-pad-sections
806 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
807 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
808 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
809
810 @item -o @var{objfile}
811 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
812
813 @item -R
814 Fold the data section into the text section.
815
816 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
817 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
818 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
819 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
820 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
821 requirements at the expense of speed.
822
823 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
824 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
825 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
826 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
827
828 @ifset ELF
829 @item --sectname-subst
830 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
831 @ifclear man
832 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
833 @end ifclear
834 @end ifset
835
836 @item --statistics
837 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
838 assembly.
839
840 @item --strip-local-absolute
841 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
842
843 @item -v
844 @itemx -version
845 Print the @command{as} version.
846
847 @item --version
848 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
849
850 @item -W
851 @itemx --no-warn
852 Suppress warning messages.
853
854 @item --fatal-warnings
855 Treat warnings as errors.
856
857 @item --warn
858 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
859
860 @item -w
861 Ignored.
862
863 @item -x
864 Ignored.
865
866 @item -Z
867 Generate an object file even after errors.
868
869 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
870 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
871
872 @end table
873 @c man end
874
875 @ifset AARCH64
876
877 @ifclear man
878 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
879 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
880 @end ifclear
881
882 @ifset man
883 @c man begin OPTIONS
884 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
885 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
886 @c man end
887 @c man begin INCLUDE
888 @include c-aarch64.texi
889 @c ended inside the included file
890 @end ifset
891
892 @end ifset
893
894 @ifset ALPHA
895
896 @ifclear man
897 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
898 for an Alpha processor.
899 @end ifclear
900
901 @ifset man
902 @c man begin OPTIONS
903 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
904 processor.
905 @c man end
906 @c man begin INCLUDE
907 @include c-alpha.texi
908 @c ended inside the included file
909 @end ifset
910
911 @end ifset
912
913 @c man begin OPTIONS
914 @ifset ARC
915 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
916 processor.
917
918 @table @gcctabopt
919 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
920 This option selects the core processor variant.
921 @item -EB | -EL
922 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
923 @item -mcode-density
924 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
925 @end table
926 @end ifset
927
928 @ifset ARM
929 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
930 processor family.
931
932 @table @gcctabopt
933 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
934 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
935 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
936 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
937 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
938 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
939 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
940 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
941 @item -mthumb
942 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
943 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
944 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
945 @item -EB | -EL
946 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
947 @item -mthumb-interwork
948 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
949 ARM code in mind.
950 @item -mccs
951 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
952 @item -k
953 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
954 @end table
955 @end ifset
956 @c man end
957
958 @ifset Blackfin
959
960 @ifclear man
961 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
962 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
963 @end ifclear
964
965 @ifset man
966 @c man begin OPTIONS
967 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
968 the Blackfin processor family.
969 @c man end
970 @c man begin INCLUDE
971 @include c-bfin.texi
972 @c ended inside the included file
973 @end ifset
974
975 @end ifset
976
977 @c man begin OPTIONS
978 @ifset CRIS
979 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
980 @end ifset
981
982 @ifset D10V
983 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
984 a D10V processor.
985 @table @gcctabopt
986 @cindex D10V optimization
987 @cindex optimization, D10V
988 @item -O
989 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
990 @end table
991 @end ifset
992
993 @ifset D30V
994 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
995 processor.
996 @table @gcctabopt
997 @cindex D30V optimization
998 @cindex optimization, D30V
999 @item -O
1000 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1001
1002 @cindex D30V nops
1003 @item -n
1004 Warn when nops are generated.
1005
1006 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1007 @item -N
1008 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1009 @end table
1010 @end ifset
1011 @c man end
1012
1013 @ifset EPIPHANY
1014 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1015 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1016
1017 @ifclear man
1018 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1019 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1020 @end ifclear
1021
1022 @ifset man
1023 @c man begin OPTIONS
1024 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1025 an Epiphany processor.
1026 @c man end
1027 @c man begin INCLUDE
1028 @include c-epiphany.texi
1029 @c ended inside the included file
1030 @end ifset
1031
1032 @end ifset
1033
1034 @ifset H8300
1035
1036 @ifclear man
1037 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1038 for an H8/300 processor.
1039 @end ifclear
1040
1041 @ifset man
1042 @c man begin OPTIONS
1043 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1044 processor.
1045 @c man end
1046 @c man begin INCLUDE
1047 @include c-h8300.texi
1048 @c ended inside the included file
1049 @end ifset
1050
1051 @end ifset
1052
1053 @ifset I80386
1054
1055 @ifclear man
1056 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1057 configured for an i386 processor.
1058 @end ifclear
1059
1060 @ifset man
1061 @c man begin OPTIONS
1062 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1063 an i386 processor.
1064 @c man end
1065 @c man begin INCLUDE
1066 @include c-i386.texi
1067 @c ended inside the included file
1068 @end ifset
1069
1070 @end ifset
1071
1072 @c man begin OPTIONS
1073 @ifset IP2K
1074 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1075 Ubicom IP2K series.
1076
1077 @table @gcctabopt
1078
1079 @item -mip2022ext
1080 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1081
1082 @item -mip2022
1083 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1084 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1085
1086 @end table
1087 @end ifset
1088
1089 @ifset M32C
1090 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1091 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1092
1093 @table @gcctabopt
1094
1095 @item -m32c
1096 Assemble M32C instructions.
1097
1098 @item -m16c
1099 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1100
1101 @item -relax
1102 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1103
1104 @item -h-tick-hex
1105 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1106
1107 @end table
1108 @end ifset
1109
1110 @ifset M32R
1111 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1112 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1113
1114 @table @gcctabopt
1115
1116 @item --m32rx
1117 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1118 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1119
1120 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1121 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1122 encountered.
1123
1124 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1125 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1126 encountered.
1127
1128 @end table
1129 @end ifset
1130
1131 @ifset M680X0
1132 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1133 Motorola 68000 series.
1134
1135 @table @gcctabopt
1136
1137 @item -l
1138 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1139
1140 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1141 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1142 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1143 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1144 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1145
1146 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1147 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1148 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1149 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1150 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1151 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1152
1153 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1154 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1155 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1156
1157 @end table
1158 @end ifset
1159
1160 @ifset NIOSII
1161
1162 @ifclear man
1163 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1164 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1165 @end ifclear
1166
1167 @ifset man
1168 @c man begin OPTIONS
1169 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1170 Altera Nios II processor.
1171 @c man end
1172 @c man begin INCLUDE
1173 @include c-nios2.texi
1174 @c ended inside the included file
1175 @end ifset
1176 @end ifset
1177
1178 @ifset PDP11
1179
1180 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1181 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1182
1183 @table @gcctabopt
1184 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1185 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1186 default is @option{-mpic}.
1187
1188 @item -mall
1189 @itemx -mall-extensions
1190 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1191
1192 @item -mno-extensions
1193 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1194
1195 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1196 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1197
1198 @item -m@var{cpu}
1199 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1200 disable all other extensions.
1201
1202 @item -m@var{machine}
1203 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1204 model, and disable all other extensions.
1205 @end table
1206
1207 @end ifset
1208
1209 @ifset PJ
1210 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1211 a picoJava processor.
1212
1213 @table @gcctabopt
1214
1215 @cindex PJ endianness
1216 @cindex endianness, PJ
1217 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1218 @item -mb
1219 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1220
1221 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1222 @item -ml
1223 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1224
1225 @end table
1226 @end ifset
1227
1228 @ifset PRU
1229
1230 @ifclear man
1231 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1232 for a PRU processor.
1233 @end ifclear
1234
1235 @ifset man
1236 @c man begin OPTIONS
1237 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1238 PRU processor.
1239 @c man end
1240 @c man begin INCLUDE
1241 @include c-pru.texi
1242 @c ended inside the included file
1243 @end ifset
1244 @end ifset
1245
1246 @ifset M68HC11
1247 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1248 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1249
1250 @table @gcctabopt
1251
1252 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1253 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1254 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1255
1256 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1257 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1258 XGATE address space.
1259
1260 @item -mshort
1261 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1262
1263 @item -mlong
1264 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1265
1266 @item -mshort-double
1267 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1268
1269 @item -mlong-double
1270 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1271
1272 @item --force-long-branches
1273 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1274 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1275 sub routine.
1276
1277 @item -S | --short-branches
1278 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1279 when the offset is out of range.
1280
1281 @item --strict-direct-mode
1282 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1283 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1284
1285 @item --print-insn-syntax
1286 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1287
1288 @item --print-opcodes
1289 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1290
1291 @item --generate-example
1292 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1293 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1294
1295 @end table
1296 @end ifset
1297
1298 @ifset SPARC
1299 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1300 for the SPARC architecture:
1301
1302 @table @gcctabopt
1303 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1304 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1305 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1306
1307 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1308 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1309
1310 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1311 UltraSPARC extensions.
1312
1313 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1314 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1315 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1316
1317 @item -bump
1318 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1319 @end table
1320 @end ifset
1321
1322 @ifset TIC54X
1323 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1324 architecture.
1325
1326 @table @gcctabopt
1327 @item -mfar-mode
1328 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1329 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1330 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1331 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1332 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1333 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1334 behaviour in the shell.
1335 @end table
1336 @end ifset
1337
1338 @ifset MIPS
1339 @c man begin OPTIONS
1340 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1341 a MIPS processor.
1342
1343 @table @gcctabopt
1344 @item -G @var{num}
1345 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1346 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1347 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1348
1349 @cindex MIPS endianness
1350 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1351 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1352 @item -EB
1353 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1354
1355 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1356 @item -EL
1357 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1358
1359 @cindex MIPS ISA
1360 @item -mips1
1361 @itemx -mips2
1362 @itemx -mips3
1363 @itemx -mips4
1364 @itemx -mips5
1365 @itemx -mips32
1366 @itemx -mips32r2
1367 @itemx -mips32r3
1368 @itemx -mips32r5
1369 @itemx -mips32r6
1370 @itemx -mips64
1371 @itemx -mips64r2
1372 @itemx -mips64r3
1373 @itemx -mips64r5
1374 @itemx -mips64r6
1375 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1376 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1377 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1378 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1379 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1380 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1381 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1382 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1383 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1384 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1385
1386 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1387 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1388
1389 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1390 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1391
1392 @item -mfix7000
1393 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1394 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1395 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1396
1397 @item -mfix-rm7000
1398 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1399 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1400 followed by a load instruction.
1401
1402 @item -mdebug
1403 @itemx -no-mdebug
1404 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1405 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1406
1407 @item -mpdr
1408 @itemx -mno-pdr
1409 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1410
1411 @item -mgp32
1412 @itemx -mfp32
1413 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1414 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1415 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1416 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1417
1418 @item -mgp64
1419 @itemx -mfp64
1420 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1421 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1422 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1423 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1424
1425 @item -mfpxx
1426 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1427 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1428 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1429 32 or 64 bits wide.
1430
1431 @item -modd-spreg
1432 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1433 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1434 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1435 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1436
1437 @item -mips16
1438 @itemx -no-mips16
1439 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1440 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1441 turns off this option.
1442
1443 @item -mmips16e2
1444 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1445 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1446 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1447 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1448
1449 @item -mmicromips
1450 @itemx -mno-micromips
1451 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1452 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1453 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1454 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1455
1456 @item -msmartmips
1457 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1458 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1459 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1460 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1461
1462 @item -mips3d
1463 @itemx -no-mips3d
1464 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1465 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1466 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1467
1468 @item -mdmx
1469 @itemx -no-mdmx
1470 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1471 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1472 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1473
1474 @item -mdsp
1475 @itemx -mno-dsp
1476 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1477 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1478 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1479
1480 @item -mdspr2
1481 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1482 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1483 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1484 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1485 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1486
1487 @item -mdspr3
1488 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1489 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1490 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1491 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1492 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1493
1494 @item -mmsa
1495 @itemx -mno-msa
1496 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1497 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1498 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1499
1500 @item -mxpa
1501 @itemx -mno-xpa
1502 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1503 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1504 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1505
1506 @item -mmt
1507 @itemx -mno-mt
1508 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1509 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1510 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1511
1512 @item -mmcu
1513 @itemx -mno-mcu
1514 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1515 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1516 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1517
1518 @item -mcrc
1519 @itemx -mno-crc
1520 Generate code for the MIPS cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application
1521 Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions.
1522 @samp{-mno-crc} turns off this option.
1523
1524 @item -mginv
1525 @itemx -mno-ginv
1526 Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific
1527 Extension. This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions.
1528 @samp{-mno-ginv} turns off this option.
1529
1530 @item -mloongson-mmi
1531 @itemx -mno-loongson-mmi
1532 Generate code for the Loongson MultiMedia extensions Instructions (MMI)
1533 Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MMI
1534 instructions.
1535 @samp{-mno-loongson-mmi} turns off this option.
1536
1537 @item -minsn32
1538 @itemx -mno-insn32
1539 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1540 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1541 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1542 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1543 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1544 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1545 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1546
1547 @item --construct-floats
1548 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1549 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1550 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1551 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1552 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1553 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1554
1555 @item --relax-branch
1556 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1557 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1558 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1559 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1560
1561 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1562 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1563 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1564 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1565 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1566 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1567 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1568 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1569 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1570 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1571
1572 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1573 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1574 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1575
1576 @cindex emulation
1577 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1578 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1579 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1580 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1581 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1582
1583 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1584 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1585 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1586 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1587 preferred options instead.
1588
1589 @item -nocpp
1590 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1591 the native tools.
1592
1593 @item --trap
1594 @itemx --no-trap
1595 @itemx --break
1596 @itemx --no-break
1597 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1598 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1599 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1600 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1601 break exception.
1602
1603 @item -n
1604 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1605 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1606 @end table
1607 @c man end
1608 @end ifset
1609
1610 @ifset MCORE
1611 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1612 an MCore processor.
1613
1614 @table @gcctabopt
1615 @item -jsri2bsr
1616 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1617 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1618 The command-line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1619
1620 @item -sifilter
1621 @itemx -nosifilter
1622 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1623 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command-line option.
1624
1625 @item -relax
1626 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1627
1628 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1629 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1630 can be assembled.
1631
1632 @item -EB
1633 Assemble for a big endian target.
1634
1635 @item -EL
1636 Assemble for a little endian target.
1637
1638 @end table
1639 @end ifset
1640 @c man end
1641
1642 @ifset METAG
1643
1644 @ifclear man
1645 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1646 for a Meta processor.
1647 @end ifclear
1648
1649 @ifset man
1650 @c man begin OPTIONS
1651 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1652 Meta processor.
1653 @c man end
1654 @c man begin INCLUDE
1655 @include c-metag.texi
1656 @c ended inside the included file
1657 @end ifset
1658
1659 @end ifset
1660
1661 @c man begin OPTIONS
1662 @ifset MMIX
1663 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1664 @end ifset
1665
1666 @ifset NDS32
1667
1668 @ifclear man
1669 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1670 for a NDS32 processor.
1671 @end ifclear
1672 @c ended inside the included file
1673 @end ifset
1674
1675 @ifset man
1676 @c man begin OPTIONS
1677 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1678 NDS32 processor.
1679 @c man end
1680 @c man begin INCLUDE
1681 @include c-nds32.texi
1682 @c ended inside the included file
1683 @end ifset
1684
1685 @c man end
1686 @ifset PPC
1687
1688 @ifclear man
1689 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1690 for a PowerPC processor.
1691 @end ifclear
1692
1693 @ifset man
1694 @c man begin OPTIONS
1695 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1696 PowerPC processor.
1697 @c man end
1698 @c man begin INCLUDE
1699 @include c-ppc.texi
1700 @c ended inside the included file
1701 @end ifset
1702
1703 @end ifset
1704
1705 @ifset RISCV
1706
1707 @ifclear man
1708 @xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1709 for a RISC-V processor.
1710 @end ifclear
1711
1712 @ifset man
1713 @c man begin OPTIONS
1714 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1715 RISC-V processor.
1716 @c man end
1717 @c man begin INCLUDE
1718 @include c-riscv.texi
1719 @c ended inside the included file
1720 @end ifset
1721
1722 @end ifset
1723
1724 @c man begin OPTIONS
1725 @ifset RX
1726 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1727 @end ifset
1728
1729 @ifset S390
1730 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1731 processor family.
1732
1733 @table @gcctabopt
1734 @item -m31
1735 @itemx -m64
1736 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1737 @item -mesa
1738 @item -mzarch
1739 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1740 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1741 @item -march=@var{processor}
1742 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1743 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1744 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1745 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1746 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), or @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}).
1747 @item -mregnames
1748 @itemx -mno-regnames
1749 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1750 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1751 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1752 but evaluates to zero.
1753 @end table
1754 @end ifset
1755 @c man end
1756
1757 @ifset TIC6X
1758
1759 @ifclear man
1760 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1761 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1762 @end ifclear
1763
1764 @ifset man
1765 @c man begin OPTIONS
1766 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1767 TMS320C6000 processor.
1768 @c man end
1769 @c man begin INCLUDE
1770 @include c-tic6x.texi
1771 @c ended inside the included file
1772 @end ifset
1773
1774 @end ifset
1775
1776 @ifset TILEGX
1777
1778 @ifclear man
1779 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1780 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1781 @end ifclear
1782
1783 @ifset man
1784 @c man begin OPTIONS
1785 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1786 processor.
1787 @c man end
1788 @c man begin INCLUDE
1789 @include c-tilegx.texi
1790 @c ended inside the included file
1791 @end ifset
1792
1793 @end ifset
1794
1795 @ifset VISIUM
1796
1797 @ifclear man
1798 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1799 for a Visium processor.
1800 @end ifclear
1801
1802 @ifset man
1803 @c man begin OPTIONS
1804 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1805 processor.
1806 @c man end
1807 @c man begin INCLUDE
1808 @include c-visium.texi
1809 @c ended inside the included file
1810 @end ifset
1811
1812 @end ifset
1813
1814 @ifset XTENSA
1815
1816 @ifclear man
1817 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1818 for an Xtensa processor.
1819 @end ifclear
1820
1821 @ifset man
1822 @c man begin OPTIONS
1823 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1824 Xtensa processor.
1825 @c man end
1826 @c man begin INCLUDE
1827 @include c-xtensa.texi
1828 @c ended inside the included file
1829 @end ifset
1830
1831 @end ifset
1832
1833 @c man begin OPTIONS
1834
1835 @ifset Z80
1836 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1837 a Z80 family processor.
1838 @table @gcctabopt
1839 @item -z80
1840 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1841 @item -r800
1842 Assemble for R800 processor.
1843 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1844 @itemx -Wnud
1845 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1846 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1847 @itemx -Wnup
1848 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1849 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1850 @itemx -Wud
1851 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1852 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1853 @itemx -Wup
1854 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1855 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1856 @itemx -Fud
1857 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1858 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1859 @itemx -Fup
1860 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1861 @end table
1862 @end ifset
1863
1864 @c man end
1865
1866 @menu
1867 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1868 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1869 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1870 * Command Line:: Command Line
1871 * Input Files:: Input Files
1872 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1873 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1874 @end menu
1875
1876 @node Manual
1877 @section Structure of this Manual
1878
1879 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1880 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1881 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1882 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1883 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1884
1885 @ifclear GENERIC
1886 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1887 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1888 @end ifclear
1889 @ifset GENERIC
1890 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1891 various flavors of the assembler.
1892 @end ifset
1893
1894 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1895 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1896 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1897 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1898 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1899 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1900 particular architecture.
1901 @ifset GENERIC
1902 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1903 machine architecture manual for this information.
1904 @end ifset
1905 @ifclear GENERIC
1906 @ifset H8/300
1907 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1908 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1909 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1910 @end ifset
1911 @ifset SH
1912 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1913 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1914 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1915 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1916 @end ifset
1917 @ifset Z8000
1918 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1919 @end ifset
1920 @end ifclear
1921
1922 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1923 @ignore
1924 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1925 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1926 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1927 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1928 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1929 qualification.
1930
1931 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1932 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1933 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1934 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1935 @end ignore
1936
1937 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1938 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1939 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1940 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1941 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1942 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1943 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1944 @c directives).
1945
1946 @node GNU Assembler
1947 @section The GNU Assembler
1948
1949 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1950
1951 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1952 @ifclear GENERIC
1953 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1954 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1955 @end ifclear
1956 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1957 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1958 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1959 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1960 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1961
1962 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1963 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1964 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1965 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1966 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1967 machine would assemble.
1968 @ifset VAX
1969 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1970 @end ifset
1971 @ifset M680X0
1972 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1973 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1974 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1975 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1976 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1977 @end ifset
1978
1979 @c man end
1980
1981 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1982 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1983 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1984
1985 @node Object Formats
1986 @section Object File Formats
1987
1988 @cindex object file format
1989 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1990 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1991 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1992 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1993 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1994 @ifclear GENERIC
1995 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1996 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1997 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1998 @end ifclear
1999 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
2000 @ifset HPPA
2001 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2002 SOM or ELF format object files.
2003 @end ifset
2004 @end ifclear
2005
2006 @node Command Line
2007 @section Command Line
2008
2009 @cindex command line conventions
2010
2011 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2012 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2013 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2014 significant.
2015
2016 @cindex standard input, as input file
2017 @kindex --
2018 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2019 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2020
2021 @cindex options, command line
2022 Except for @samp{--} any command-line argument that begins with a
2023 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2024 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2025 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2026 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2027
2028 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2029 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2030 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2031 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2032
2033 @smallexample
2034 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2035 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2036 @end smallexample
2037
2038 @node Input Files
2039 @section Input Files
2040
2041 @cindex input
2042 @cindex source program
2043 @cindex files, input
2044 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2045 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2046 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2047 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2048
2049 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2050 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2051 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2052 order specified.
2053
2054 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2055 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2056 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2057 (The standard input is also a file.)
2058
2059 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2060 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2061 command-line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2062 is taken to be an input file name.
2063
2064 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2065 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2066 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2067 to assemble.
2068
2069 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2070 in your command line.
2071
2072 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2073 file.
2074
2075 @c man end
2076
2077 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2078
2079 @cindex input file linenumbers
2080 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2081 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2082 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2083 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2084 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2085
2086 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2087 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2088
2089 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2090 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2091 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2092 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2093 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2094 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2095
2096 @node Object
2097 @section Output (Object) File
2098
2099 @cindex object file
2100 @cindex output file
2101 @kindex a.out
2102 @kindex .o
2103 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2104 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2105 is the object file. Its default name is @code{a.out}.
2106 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2107 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2108 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2109 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2110 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2111
2112 @cindex linker
2113 @kindex ld
2114 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2115 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2116 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2117 information for the debugger.
2118
2119 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2120 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2121
2122 @node Errors
2123 @section Error and Warning Messages
2124
2125 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2126
2127 @cindex error messages
2128 @cindex warning messages
2129 @cindex messages from assembler
2130 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2131 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2132 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2133 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2134 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2135
2136 @c man end
2137
2138 @cindex format of warning messages
2139 Warning messages have the format
2140
2141 @smallexample
2142 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2143 @end smallexample
2144
2145 @noindent
2146 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2147 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2148 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2149 @ifset GENERIC
2150 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2151 @end ifset
2152 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2153 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2154 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2155
2156 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2157 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2158
2159 @smallexample
2160 .file 2 "bar.c"
2161 error_assembler_source
2162 .file "foo.c"
2163 .line 30
2164 error_c_source
2165 @end smallexample
2166
2167 produces this output:
2168
2169 @smallexample
2170 Assembler messages:
2171 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2172 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2173 @end smallexample
2174
2175 @cindex format of error messages
2176 Error messages have the format
2177
2178 @smallexample
2179 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2180 @end smallexample
2181
2182 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2183 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2184 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2185
2186 @node Invoking
2187 @chapter Command-Line Options
2188
2189 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2190 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2191 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2192 for options specific
2193 @ifclear GENERIC
2194 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2195 @end ifclear
2196 @ifset GENERIC
2197 to particular machine architectures.
2198 @end ifset
2199
2200 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2201
2202 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2203 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2204 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2205 by commas. For example:
2206
2207 @smallexample
2208 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2209 @end smallexample
2210
2211 @noindent
2212 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2213 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2214 local symbols in the symbol table).
2215
2216 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2217 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2218 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2219 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2220 assembler.)
2221
2222 @c man end
2223
2224 @menu
2225 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2226 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2227 * D:: -D for compatibility
2228 * f:: -f to work faster
2229 * I:: -I for .include search path
2230 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2231 * K:: -K for compatibility
2232 @end ifclear
2233 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2234 * K:: -K for difference tables
2235 @end ifset
2236
2237 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2238 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2239 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2240 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2241 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2242 * o:: -o to name the object file
2243 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2244 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2245 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2246 * v:: -v to announce version
2247 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2248 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2249 @end menu
2250
2251 @node a
2252 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2253
2254 @kindex -a
2255 @kindex -ac
2256 @kindex -ad
2257 @kindex -ag
2258 @kindex -ah
2259 @kindex -al
2260 @kindex -an
2261 @kindex -as
2262 @cindex listings, enabling
2263 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2264
2265 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2266 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2267 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2268 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2269 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2270 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2271 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2272 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2273 also.
2274
2275 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2276 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2277
2278 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2279 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2280 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2281 omitted from the listing.
2282
2283 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2284 listing.
2285
2286 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2287 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2288 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2289 @code{.sbttl}.
2290 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2291 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2292 listing-control directives have no effect.
2293
2294 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2295 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2296
2297 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2298 because it
2299 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command-line switch
2300 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2301 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2302 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2303 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2304
2305 @node alternate
2306 @section @option{--alternate}
2307
2308 @kindex --alternate
2309 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2310
2311 @node D
2312 @section @option{-D}
2313
2314 @kindex -D
2315 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2316 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2317 @command{@value{AS}}.
2318
2319 @node f
2320 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2321
2322 @kindex -f
2323 @cindex trusted compiler
2324 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2325 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2326 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2327 and comment preprocessing on
2328 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2329 ,Preprocessing}.
2330
2331 @quotation
2332 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2333 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2334 not work correctly.
2335 @end quotation
2336
2337 @node I
2338 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2339
2340 @kindex -I @var{path}
2341 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2342 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2343 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2344 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2345 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2346 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2347 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2348 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2349 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2350 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2351
2352 @node K
2353 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2354
2355 @kindex -K
2356 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2357 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2358 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2359 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2360 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2361 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2362 alteration on other platforms.
2363 @end ifclear
2364
2365 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2366 @cindex difference tables, warning
2367 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2368 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2369 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2370 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2371 is done.
2372 @end ifset
2373
2374 @node L
2375 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2376
2377 @kindex -L
2378 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2379 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2380 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2381 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2382 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2383 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2384 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2385 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2386
2387 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2388 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2389 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2390
2391 @node listing
2392 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2393
2394 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command-line switch
2395 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2396 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2397 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2398 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2399 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2400 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2401 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2402
2403 @table @gcctabopt
2404 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2405 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2406 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2407 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2408 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2409
2410 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2411 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2412 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2413 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2414 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2415 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2416 switch is used the default is to one.
2417
2418 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2419 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2420 @cindex Width of source line output
2421 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2422 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2423 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2424
2425 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2426 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2427 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2428 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2429 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2430 @end table
2431
2432 @node M
2433 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2434
2435 @kindex -M
2436 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2437 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2438 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2439 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} assembler from Microtec Research.
2440 The exact nature of the
2441 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2442 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2443 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2444 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2445
2446 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2447 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2448 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2449 individually. These are:
2450
2451 @itemize @bullet
2452 @item global symbols in common section
2453
2454 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2455 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2456 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2457 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2458 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2459
2460 @item complex relocations
2461
2462 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2463 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2464 are not support by other object file formats.
2465
2466 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2467
2468 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2469 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2470 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2471 script.
2472
2473 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2474
2475 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2476 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2477
2478 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2479
2480 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2481 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2482 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2483 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2484 assigned within a linker script.
2485 @end itemize
2486
2487 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2488 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2489 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2490
2491 @itemize @bullet
2492
2493 @item EBCDIC strings
2494
2495 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2496
2497 @item packed binary coded decimal
2498
2499 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2500 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2501
2502 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2503
2504 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2505
2506 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2507
2508 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2509
2510 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2511
2512 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2513 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2514 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2515 these options serve no purpose.
2516
2517 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2518
2519 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2520 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2521 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2522
2523 @item other @code{OPT} options
2524
2525 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2526 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2527
2528 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2529
2530 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2531 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2532
2533 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2534
2535 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2536
2537 @end itemize
2538
2539 @node MD
2540 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2541
2542 @kindex --MD
2543 @cindex dependency tracking
2544 @cindex make rules
2545
2546 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2547 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2548 dependencies of the main source file.
2549
2550 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2551
2552 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2553
2554 @node no-pad-sections
2555 @section Output Section Padding
2556 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2557 @cindex output section padding
2558 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2559 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2560 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2561 disable this behaviour.
2562
2563 @node o
2564 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2565
2566 @kindex -o
2567 @cindex naming object file
2568 @cindex object file name
2569 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2570 default it has the name @file{a.out}.
2571 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2572 object file a different name.
2573
2574 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2575 existing file of the same name.
2576
2577 @node R
2578 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2579
2580 @kindex -R
2581 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2582 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2583 @cindex joining text and data sections
2584 @cindex merging text and data sections
2585 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2586 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2587 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2588 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2589 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2590 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2591
2592 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2593 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2594 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2595 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2596
2597 @ifset COFF-ELF
2598 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2599 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2600 @samp{.data}.
2601 @end ifset
2602
2603 @ifset HPPA
2604 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2605 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2606 @end ifset
2607
2608 @node statistics
2609 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2610
2611 @kindex --statistics
2612 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2613 @cindex time, total for assembly
2614 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2615 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2616 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2617 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2618 seconds).
2619
2620 @node traditional-format
2621 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2622
2623 @kindex --traditional-format
2624 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2625 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2626 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2627
2628 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2629 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2630
2631 @node v
2632 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2633
2634 @kindex -v
2635 @kindex -version
2636 @cindex assembler version
2637 @cindex version of assembler
2638 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2639 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2640 command line.
2641
2642 @node W
2643 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2644
2645 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2646 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2647 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2648 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2649
2650 @kindex -W
2651 @kindex --no-warn
2652 @cindex suppressing warnings
2653 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2654 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2655 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2656 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2657 are still reported.
2658
2659 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2660 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2661 @cindex warnings, causing error
2662 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2663 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2664
2665 @kindex --warn
2666 @cindex warnings, switching on
2667 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2668 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2669
2670 @node Z
2671 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2672 @cindex object file, after errors
2673 @cindex errors, continuing after
2674 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2675 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2676 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2677 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2678 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2679 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2680
2681 @node Syntax
2682 @chapter Syntax
2683
2684 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2685 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2686 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2687 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2688 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2689 @ifclear VAX
2690 assembler.
2691 @end ifclear
2692 @ifset VAX
2693 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2694 @end ifset
2695
2696 @menu
2697 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2698 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2699 * Comments:: Comments
2700 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2701 * Statements:: Statements
2702 * Constants:: Constants
2703 @end menu
2704
2705 @node Preprocessing
2706 @section Preprocessing
2707
2708 @cindex preprocessing
2709 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2710 @itemize @bullet
2711 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2712 @item
2713 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2714 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2715 a single space.
2716
2717 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2718 @item
2719 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2720 appropriate number of newlines.
2721
2722 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2723 @item
2724 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2725 @end itemize
2726
2727 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2728 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2729 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2730 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2731 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2732 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2733 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2734
2735 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2736 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2737 preprocessed.
2738
2739 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2740 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2741 @kindex #NO_APP
2742 @kindex #APP
2743 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2744 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2745 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2746 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2747 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2748 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2749 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2750 and whitespace.
2751
2752 @node Whitespace
2753 @section Whitespace
2754
2755 @cindex whitespace
2756 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2757 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2758 people to read. Unless within character constants
2759 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2760 as exactly one space.
2761
2762 @node Comments
2763 @section Comments
2764
2765 @cindex comments
2766 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2767 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2768
2769 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2770 This means you may not nest these comments.
2771
2772 @smallexample
2773 /*
2774 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2775 is to use this sort of comment.
2776 */
2777
2778 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2779 @end smallexample
2780
2781 @cindex line comment character
2782 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2783 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2784 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2785 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2786 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2787 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2788 upon command-line options that have been used. For more details see the
2789 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2790
2791 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2792 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2793 to specify logical line numbers:
2794
2795 @kindex #
2796 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2797 @cindex logical line numbers
2798 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2799 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2800 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2801 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2802 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2803
2804 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2805 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2806
2807 @smallexample
2808 # This is an ordinary comment.
2809 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2810 # This is logical line # 36.
2811 @end smallexample
2812 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2813 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2814
2815 @node Symbol Intro
2816 @section Symbols
2817
2818 @cindex characters used in symbols
2819 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2820 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2821 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2822 @samp{_.$}.
2823 @end ifclear
2824 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2825 @ifclear GENERIC
2826 @ifset H8
2827 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2828 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2829 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2830 symbol names.)
2831 @end ifset
2832 @end ifclear
2833 @end ifset
2834 @ifset GENERIC
2835 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2836 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2837 @end ifset
2838 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2839 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2840 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2841 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2842 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2843
2844 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2845 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2846 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2847 backslash @code{\} character.
2848 @cindex length of symbols
2849
2850 @node Statements
2851 @section Statements
2852
2853 @cindex statements, structure of
2854 @cindex line separator character
2855 @cindex statement separator character
2856
2857 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2858 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2859 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2860 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2861 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2862 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2863 exception: they do not end statements.
2864
2865 @cindex newline, required at file end
2866 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2867 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2868 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2869
2870 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2871
2872 @cindex instructions and directives
2873 @cindex directives and instructions
2874 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2875 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2876 @c 13feb91.
2877 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2878 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2879 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2880 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2881 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2882 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2883 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2884 @ifset GENERIC
2885 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2886 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2887 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2888 language.@refill
2889 @end ifset
2890
2891 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2892 @cindex label (@code{:})
2893 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2894 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2895 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2896
2897 @ifset HPPA
2898 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2899 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2900 only one label may be defined on each line.
2901 @end ifset
2902
2903 @smallexample
2904 label: .directive followed by something
2905 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2906 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2907 @end smallexample
2908
2909 @node Constants
2910 @section Constants
2911
2912 @cindex constants
2913 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2914 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2915 @smallexample
2916 @group
2917 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2918 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2919 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2920 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2921 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2922 @end group
2923 @end smallexample
2924
2925 @menu
2926 * Characters:: Character Constants
2927 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2928 @end menu
2929
2930 @node Characters
2931 @subsection Character Constants
2932
2933 @cindex character constants
2934 @cindex constants, character
2935 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2936 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2937 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2938 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2939 used in arithmetic expressions.
2940
2941 @menu
2942 * Strings:: Strings
2943 * Chars:: Characters
2944 @end menu
2945
2946 @node Strings
2947 @subsubsection Strings
2948
2949 @cindex string constants
2950 @cindex constants, string
2951 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2952 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2953 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2954 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2955 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2956 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2957 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2958 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2959
2960 @cindex escape codes, character
2961 @cindex character escape codes
2962 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2963 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2964 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2965 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2966 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2967 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2968 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2969 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2970 @table @kbd
2971 @c @item \a
2972 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2973 @c
2974 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2975 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2976 @item \b
2977 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2978
2979 @c @item \e
2980 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2981 @c
2982 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2983 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2984 @item backslash-f
2985 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2986
2987 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
2988 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2989 @item \n
2990 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2991
2992 @c @item \p
2993 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2994 @c
2995 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
2996 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
2997 @item \r
2998 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2999
3000 @c @item \s
3001 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3002 @c other assemblers.
3003 @c
3004 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3005 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3006 @item \t
3007 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3008
3009 @c @item \v
3010 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3011 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3012 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3013 @c
3014 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3015 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3016 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3017 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3018 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3019 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3020
3021 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3022 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3023 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3024 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3025 lower case @code{x} works.
3026
3027 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3028 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3029 @item \\
3030 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3031
3032 @c @item \'
3033 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3034 @c This is needed in single character literals
3035 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3036 @c a @samp{'}.
3037 @c
3038 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3039 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3040 @item \"
3041 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3042 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3043
3044 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3045 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3046 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3047 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3048 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3049 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3050 code and warns you of the fact.
3051 @end table
3052
3053 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3054 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3055 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3056 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3057 sequence.
3058
3059 @node Chars
3060 @subsubsection Characters
3061
3062 @cindex single character constant
3063 @cindex character, single
3064 @cindex constant, single character
3065 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3066 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3067 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3068 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3069 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3070 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3071 accent. A newline
3072 @ifclear GENERIC
3073 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3074 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3075 @end ifclear
3076 @ifset abnormal-separator
3077 @ifset H8
3078 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3079 Renesas SH)
3080 @end ifset
3081 @end ifset
3082 @end ifclear
3083 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3084 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3085 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3086 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3087 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3088
3089 @node Numbers
3090 @subsection Number Constants
3091
3092 @cindex constants, number
3093 @cindex number constants
3094 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3095 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3096 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3097 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3098 are floating point numbers, described below.
3099
3100 @menu
3101 * Integers:: Integers
3102 * Bignums:: Bignums
3103 * Flonums:: Flonums
3104 @ifclear GENERIC
3105 @end ifclear
3106 @end menu
3107
3108 @node Integers
3109 @subsubsection Integers
3110 @cindex integers
3111 @cindex constants, integer
3112
3113 @cindex binary integers
3114 @cindex integers, binary
3115 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3116 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3117
3118 @cindex octal integers
3119 @cindex integers, octal
3120 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3121 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3122
3123 @cindex decimal integers
3124 @cindex integers, decimal
3125 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3126 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3127
3128 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3129 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3130 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3131 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3132
3133 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3134 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3135 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3136
3137 @node Bignums
3138 @subsubsection Bignums
3139
3140 @cindex bignums
3141 @cindex constants, bignum
3142 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3143 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3144 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3145 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3146
3147 @node Flonums
3148 @subsubsection Flonums
3149 @cindex flonums
3150 @cindex floating point numbers
3151 @cindex constants, floating point
3152
3153 @cindex precision, floating point
3154 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3155 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3156 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3157 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3158 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3159 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3160
3161 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3162 @itemize @bullet
3163 @item
3164 The digit @samp{0}.
3165 @ifset HPPA
3166 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3167 @end ifset
3168
3169 @item
3170 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3171 @ifset GENERIC
3172 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3173 @ignore
3174 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3175 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3176 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3177 @end ignore
3178
3179 On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be
3180 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3181
3182 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3183 (in upper or lower case).
3184
3185 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3186 @end ifset
3187 @ifclear GENERIC
3188 @ifset ARC
3189 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3190 @end ifset
3191 @ifset H8
3192 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3193 @end ifset
3194 @ifset HPPA
3195 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3196 @end ifset
3197 @end ifclear
3198
3199 @item
3200 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3201
3202 @item
3203 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3204
3205 @item
3206 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3207 or more decimal digits.
3208
3209 @item
3210 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3211
3212 @itemize @bullet
3213 @item
3214 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3215 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3216 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3217 @item
3218 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3219 @item
3220 One or more decimal digits.
3221 @end itemize
3222
3223 @end itemize
3224
3225 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3226 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3227
3228 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3229 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3230 @command{@value{AS}}.
3231
3232 @node Sections
3233 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3234 @cindex sections
3235 @cindex relocation
3236
3237 @menu
3238 * Secs Background:: Background
3239 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3240 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3241 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3242 * bss:: bss Section
3243 @end menu
3244
3245 @node Secs Background
3246 @section Background
3247
3248 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3249 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3250 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3251
3252 @cindex linker, and assembler
3253 @cindex assembler, and linker
3254 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3255 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3256 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3257 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3258 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3259 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3260 sections.
3261
3262 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3263 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3264 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3265 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3266 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3267 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3268 the proper run-time addresses.
3269 @ifset H8
3270 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3271 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3272 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3273 @end ifset
3274
3275 @cindex standard assembler sections
3276 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3277 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3278 @dfn{bss} sections.
3279
3280 @ifset COFF-ELF
3281 @ifset GENERIC
3282 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3283 @end ifset
3284 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3285 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3286 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3287 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3288 @end ifset
3289
3290 @ifset HPPA
3291 @ifset GENERIC
3292 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3293 @end ifset
3294 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3295 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3296 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3297 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3298 assembler directives.
3299
3300 @ifset SOM
3301 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3302 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3303 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3304 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3305 @end ifset
3306 @end ifset
3307
3308 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3309 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3310
3311 @ifset HPPA
3312 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3313 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3314 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3315 @end ifset
3316
3317 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3318 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3319 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3320 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3321 file is mentioned:
3322 @itemize @bullet
3323 @item
3324 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3325 an address?
3326 @item
3327 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3328 @item
3329 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3330 @display
3331 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3332 @end display
3333 @item
3334 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3335 @end itemize
3336
3337 @cindex addresses, format of
3338 @cindex section-relative addressing
3339 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3340 @display
3341 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3342 @end display
3343 @noindent
3344 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3345 nature.
3346 @ifset SOM
3347 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3348 symbol-relative instead.)
3349 @end ifset
3350
3351 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3352 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3353
3354 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3355 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3356 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3357 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3358 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3359 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3360 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3361 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3362 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3363
3364 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3365 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3366 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3367 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3368 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3369 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3370 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3371
3372 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3373 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3374 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3375 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3376 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3377 data and bss sections.
3378
3379 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3380 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3381
3382 @node Ld Sections
3383 @section Linker Sections
3384 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3385
3386 @table @strong
3387
3388 @ifset COFF-ELF
3389 @cindex named sections
3390 @cindex sections, named
3391 @item named sections
3392 @end ifset
3393 @ifset aout
3394 @cindex text section
3395 @cindex data section
3396 @itemx text section
3397 @itemx data section
3398 @end ifset
3399 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3400 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3401 true of another.
3402 @c @ifset aout
3403 When the program is running, however, it is
3404 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3405 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3406 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3407 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3408 in the data section.
3409 @c @end ifset
3410
3411 @cindex bss section
3412 @item bss section
3413 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3414 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3415 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3416 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3417 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3418 those explicit zeros from object files.
3419
3420 @cindex absolute section
3421 @item absolute section
3422 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3423 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3424 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3425 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3426
3427 @cindex undefined section
3428 @item undefined section
3429 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3430 the preceding sections.
3431 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3432 @end table
3433
3434 @cindex relocation example
3435 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3436 @ifset COFF-ELF
3437 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3438 @end ifset
3439 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3440
3441 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3442 @ifnottex
3443 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3444 @smallexample
3445 +-----+----+--+
3446 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3447 +-----+----+--+
3448
3449 text data bss
3450 seg. seg. seg.
3451
3452 +---+---+---+
3453 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3454 +---+---+---+
3455
3456 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3457 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3458 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3459
3460 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3461 @end smallexample
3462 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3463 @end ifnottex
3464 @need 5000
3465 @tex
3466 \bigskip
3467 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3468 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3469 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3470
3471 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3472 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3473 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3474
3475 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3476 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3477 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3478 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3479 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3480
3481 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3482 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3483
3484 @end tex
3485 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3486
3487 @node As Sections
3488 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3489
3490 @cindex internal assembler sections
3491 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3492 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3493 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3494 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3495 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3496 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3497 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3498 section-relative address.
3499
3500 @table @b
3501 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3502 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3503 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3504 bug in the assembler.
3505
3506 @cindex expr (internal section)
3507 @item expr section
3508 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3509 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3510 it in the expr section.
3511 @c FIXME item debug
3512 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3513 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3514 @c FIXME item register
3515 @end table
3516
3517 @node Sub-Sections
3518 @section Sub-Sections
3519
3520 @cindex numbered subsections
3521 @cindex grouping data
3522 @ifset aout
3523 Assembled bytes
3524 @ifset COFF-ELF
3525 conventionally
3526 @end ifset
3527 fall into two sections: text and data.
3528 @end ifset
3529 You may have separate groups of
3530 @ifset GENERIC
3531 data in named sections
3532 @end ifset
3533 @ifclear GENERIC
3534 @ifclear aout
3535 data in named sections
3536 @end ifclear
3537 @ifset aout
3538 text or data
3539 @end ifset
3540 @end ifclear
3541 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3542 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3543 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3544 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3545 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3546 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3547 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3548 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3549 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3550 constants being output.
3551
3552 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3553 goes in subsection number zero.
3554
3555 @ifset GENERIC
3556 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3557 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3558 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3559 @end ifset
3560 @ifclear GENERIC
3561 @ifset H8
3562 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3563 boundary (two bytes).
3564 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3565 @end ifset
3566 @end ifclear
3567
3568 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3569 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3570 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3571 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3572 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3573 data subsections as a data section.
3574
3575 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3576 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3577 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3578 @ifset COFF
3579 @ifset GENERIC
3580 When generating COFF output, you
3581 @end ifset
3582 @ifclear GENERIC
3583 You
3584 @end ifclear
3585 can also use an extra subsection
3586 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3587 @var{expression}}.
3588 @end ifset
3589 @ifset ELF
3590 @ifset GENERIC
3591 When generating ELF output, you
3592 @end ifset
3593 @ifclear GENERIC
3594 You
3595 @end ifclear
3596 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3597 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3598 @end ifset
3599 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3600 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3601 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3602 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3603 @smallexample
3604 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3605 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3606 .text 1
3607 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3608 .data 0
3609 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3610 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3611 .text 0
3612 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3613 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3614 @end smallexample
3615
3616 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3617 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3618 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3619 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3620 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3621 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3622 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3623
3624 @node bss
3625 @section bss Section
3626
3627 @cindex bss section
3628 @cindex common variable storage
3629 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3630 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3631 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3632 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3633 section are zeroed bytes.
3634
3635 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3636 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3637
3638 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3639 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3640
3641 @ifset GENERIC
3642 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3643 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3644 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3645 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3646 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3647 @end ifset
3648
3649 @node Symbols
3650 @chapter Symbols
3651
3652 @cindex symbols
3653 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3654 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3655 to debug.
3656
3657 @quotation
3658 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3659 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3660 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3661 @end quotation
3662
3663 @menu
3664 * Labels:: Labels
3665 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3666 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3667 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3668 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3669 @end menu
3670
3671 @node Labels
3672 @section Labels
3673
3674 @cindex labels
3675 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3676 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3677 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3678 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3679 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3680 definitions.
3681
3682 @ifset HPPA
3683 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3684 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3685 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3686 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3687 @end ifset
3688
3689 @node Setting Symbols
3690 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3691
3692 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3693 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3694 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3695 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3696 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3697 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3698 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3699 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3700
3701 @ifset Blackfin
3702 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3703 @end ifset
3704
3705 @node Symbol Names
3706 @section Symbol Names
3707
3708 @cindex symbol names
3709 @cindex names, symbol
3710 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3711 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3712 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3713 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3714 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3715 particular target machine), and underscores.
3716 @end ifclear
3717 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3718 @ifset H8
3719 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3720 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3721 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3722 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3723 @end ifset
3724 @end ifset
3725
3726 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3727 than @code{Foo}.
3728
3729 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3730 Local Labels. See below.
3731
3732 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3733 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3734 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3735 currently supported.
3736
3737 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3738 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3739 in a program.
3740
3741 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3742
3743 @cindex local symbol names
3744 @cindex symbol names, local
3745 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3746 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3747 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3748 set of local label prefixes.
3749 @ifset HPPA
3750 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3751 @end ifset
3752
3753 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3754 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3755 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3756 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3757
3758 @subheading Local Labels
3759
3760 @cindex local labels
3761 @cindex temporary symbol names
3762 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3763 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3764 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3765 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3766 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3767 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3768 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3769 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3770 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3771 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3772
3773 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3774 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3775 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3776 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3777 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3778 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3779 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3780
3781 Here is an example:
3782
3783 @smallexample
3784 1: branch 1f
3785 2: branch 1b
3786 1: branch 2f
3787 2: branch 1b
3788 @end smallexample
3789
3790 Which is the equivalent of:
3791
3792 @smallexample
3793 label_1: branch label_3
3794 label_2: branch label_1
3795 label_3: branch label_4
3796 label_4: branch label_3
3797 @end smallexample
3798
3799 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3800 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3801 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3802 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3803 these parts:
3804
3805 @table @code
3806 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3807 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3808 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3809 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3810 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3811 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3812 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3813 you may use them in debugging.
3814
3815 @item @var{number}
3816 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3817 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3818
3819 @item @kbd{C-B}
3820 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3821 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3822
3823 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3824 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3825 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3826 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3827 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3828 @end table
3829
3830 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3831 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3832
3833 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3834 @cindex dollar local symbols
3835
3836 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3837 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3838 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3839 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3840 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3841 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3842
3843 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3844 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3845 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3846
3847 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3848 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3849 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3850 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3851
3852 @node Dot
3853 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3854
3855 @cindex dot (symbol)
3856 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3857 @cindex current address
3858 @cindex location counter
3859 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3860 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3861 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3862 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3863 directive.
3864 @ifclear no-space-dir
3865 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3866 @samp{.space 4}.
3867 @end ifclear
3868
3869 @node Symbol Attributes
3870 @section Symbol Attributes
3871
3872 @cindex symbol attributes
3873 @cindex attributes, symbol
3874 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3875 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3876 attributes.
3877 @ifset INTERNALS
3878 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3879 @end ifset
3880
3881 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3882 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3883 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3884 would want.
3885
3886 @menu
3887 * Symbol Value:: Value
3888 * Symbol Type:: Type
3889 @ifset aout
3890 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3891 @end ifset
3892 @ifset COFF
3893 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3894 @end ifset
3895 @ifset SOM
3896 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3897 @end ifset
3898 @end menu
3899
3900 @node Symbol Value
3901 @subsection Value
3902
3903 @cindex value of a symbol
3904 @cindex symbol value
3905 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3906 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3907 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3908 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3909 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3910 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3911 called absolute.
3912
3913 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3914 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3915 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3916 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3917 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3918 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3919 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3920 allocated storage.
3921
3922 @node Symbol Type
3923 @subsection Type
3924
3925 @cindex type of a symbol
3926 @cindex symbol type
3927 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3928 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3929 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3930 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3931
3932 @ifset aout
3933 @node a.out Symbols
3934 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3935
3936 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3937 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3938
3939 @menu
3940 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3941 * Symbol Other:: Other
3942 @end menu
3943
3944 @node Symbol Desc
3945 @subsubsection Descriptor
3946
3947 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3948 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3949 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3950 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3951 @command{@value{AS}}.
3952
3953 @node Symbol Other
3954 @subsubsection Other
3955
3956 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3957 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3958 @end ifset
3959
3960 @ifset COFF
3961 @node COFF Symbols
3962 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3963
3964 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3965 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3966
3967 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3968 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3969 @code{.endef} directives.
3970
3971 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3972
3973 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3974 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3975 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3976
3977 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3978
3979 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3980 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3981 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3982 table information for COFF.
3983 @end ifset
3984
3985 @ifset SOM
3986 @node SOM Symbols
3987 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3988
3989 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3990 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3991
3992 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3993 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3994
3995 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3996 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3997 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3998 @end ifset
3999
4000 @node Expressions
4001 @chapter Expressions
4002
4003 @cindex expressions
4004 @cindex addresses
4005 @cindex numeric values
4006 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4007 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4008
4009 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4010 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4011 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4012 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4013 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4014 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4015
4016 @menu
4017 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4018 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4019 @end menu
4020
4021 @node Empty Exprs
4022 @section Empty Expressions
4023
4024 @cindex empty expressions
4025 @cindex expressions, empty
4026 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4027 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4028 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4029 is compatible with other assemblers.
4030
4031 @node Integer Exprs
4032 @section Integer Expressions
4033
4034 @cindex integer expressions
4035 @cindex expressions, integer
4036 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4037 by @emph{operators}.
4038
4039 @menu
4040 * Arguments:: Arguments
4041 * Operators:: Operators
4042 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4043 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4044 @end menu
4045
4046 @node Arguments
4047 @subsection Arguments
4048
4049 @cindex expression arguments
4050 @cindex arguments in expressions
4051 @cindex operands in expressions
4052 @cindex arithmetic operands
4053 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4054 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4055 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4056 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4057 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4058 instruction operands.
4059
4060 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4061 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4062 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4063 integer.
4064
4065 Numbers are usually integers.
4066
4067 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4068 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4069 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4070 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4071 assemblers.
4072
4073 @cindex subexpressions
4074 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4075 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4076 operator followed by an argument.
4077
4078 @node Operators
4079 @subsection Operators
4080
4081 @cindex operators, in expressions
4082 @cindex arithmetic functions
4083 @cindex functions, in expressions
4084 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4085 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4086 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4087 whitespace.
4088
4089 @node Prefix Ops
4090 @subsection Prefix Operator
4091
4092 @cindex prefix operators
4093 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4094 one argument, which must be absolute.
4095
4096 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4097 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4098 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4099 @tex
4100 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4101 @end tex
4102
4103 @table @code
4104 @item -
4105 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4106 @item ~
4107 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4108 @end table
4109
4110 @tex
4111 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4112 @end tex
4113
4114 @node Infix Ops
4115 @subsection Infix Operators
4116
4117 @cindex infix operators
4118 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4119 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4120 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4121 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4122 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4123
4124 @enumerate
4125 @cindex operator precedence
4126 @cindex precedence of operators
4127
4128 @item
4129 Highest Precedence
4130
4131 @table @code
4132 @item *
4133 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4134
4135 @item /
4136 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4137
4138 @item %
4139 @dfn{Remainder}.
4140
4141 @item <<
4142 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4143
4144 @item >>
4145 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4146 @end table
4147
4148 @item
4149 Intermediate precedence
4150
4151 @table @code
4152 @item |
4153
4154 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4155
4156 @item &
4157 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4158
4159 @item ^
4160 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4161
4162 @item !
4163 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4164 @end table
4165
4166 @item
4167 Low Precedence
4168
4169 @table @code
4170 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4171 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4172 @cindex arguments for addition
4173 @item +
4174 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4175 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4176 sections.
4177
4178 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4179 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4180 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4181 @item -
4182 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4183 result has the section of the left argument.
4184 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4185 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4186 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4187
4188 @cindex comparison expressions
4189 @cindex expressions, comparison
4190 @item ==
4191 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4192 @item <>
4193 @itemx !=
4194 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4195 @item <
4196 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4197 @item >
4198 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4199 @item >=
4200 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4201 @item <=
4202 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4203
4204 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4205 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4206 perform signed comparisons.
4207 @end table
4208
4209 @item Lowest Precedence
4210
4211 @table @code
4212 @item &&
4213 @dfn{Logical And}.
4214
4215 @item ||
4216 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4217
4218 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4219 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4220 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4221 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4222
4223 @end table
4224 @end enumerate
4225
4226 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4227 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4228
4229 @node Pseudo Ops
4230 @chapter Assembler Directives
4231
4232 @cindex directives, machine independent
4233 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4234 @cindex machine independent directives
4235 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4236 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4237 in lower case.
4238
4239 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4240 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4241 @ifset GENERIC
4242 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4243 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4244 @end ifset
4245 @ifclear GENERIC
4246 @ifset machine-directives
4247 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4248 @end ifset
4249 @end ifclear
4250
4251 @menu
4252 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4253 @ifset COFF
4254 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4255 @end ifset
4256
4257 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4258 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4259 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4260 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4261 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4262 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4263 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4264 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4265 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4266 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4267 * Dc:: @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4268 * Dcb:: @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4269 * Ds:: @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4270 @ifset COFF
4271 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4272 @end ifset
4273 @ifset aout
4274 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4275 @end ifset
4276 @ifset COFF
4277 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4278 @end ifset
4279
4280 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4281 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4282 * Else:: @code{.else}
4283 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4284 * End:: @code{.end}
4285 @ifset COFF
4286 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4287 @end ifset
4288
4289 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4290 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4291 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4292 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4293 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4294 * Err:: @code{.err}
4295 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4296 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4297 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4298 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4299 * File:: @code{.file}
4300 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4301 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4302 * Func:: @code{.func}
4303 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4304 @ifset ELF
4305 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4306 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4307 @end ifset
4308
4309 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4310 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4311 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4312 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4313 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4314 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4315 @ifset ELF
4316 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4317 @end ifset
4318
4319 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4320 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4321 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4322 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4323 @ifclear no-line-dir
4324 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4325 @end ifclear
4326
4327 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4328 * List:: @code{.list}
4329 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4330 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4331 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4332 @ifset ELF
4333 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4334 @end ifset
4335
4336 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4337 @ignore
4338 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4339 @end ignore
4340
4341 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4342 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4343 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4344 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4345 * Nops:: @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
4346 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4347 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4348 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4349 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4350 @ifset ELF
4351 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4352 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4353 @end ifset
4354
4355 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4356 @ifset ELF
4357 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4358 @end ifset
4359
4360 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4361 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4362 @ifset ELF
4363 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4364 @end ifset
4365
4366 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4367 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4368 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4369 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4370 @ifset COFF
4371 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4372 @end ifset
4373 @ifset COFF-ELF
4374 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4375 @end ifset
4376
4377 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4378 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4379 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4380 @ifset COFF-ELF
4381 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4382 @end ifset
4383 @ifclear no-space-dir
4384 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4385 @end ifclear
4386
4387 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4388 @ifclear no-space-dir
4389 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4390 @end ifclear
4391 @ifset have-stabs
4392 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4393 @end ifset
4394
4395 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4396 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4397 @ifset ELF
4398 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4399 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4400 @end ifset
4401
4402 @ifset COFF
4403 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4404 @end ifset
4405
4406 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4407 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4408 @ifset COFF-ELF
4409 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4410 @end ifset
4411
4412 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4413 @ifset COFF
4414 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4415 @end ifset
4416
4417 @ifset ELF
4418 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4419 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4420 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4421 @end ifset
4422
4423 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4424 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4425 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4426 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4427 @ifclear no-space-dir
4428 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4429 @end ifclear
4430 @ifset ELF
4431 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4432 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4433 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4434 @end ifset
4435 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4436 @end menu
4437
4438 @node Abort
4439 @section @code{.abort}
4440
4441 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4442 @cindex stopping the assembly
4443 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4444 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4445 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4446 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4447 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4448
4449 @ifset COFF
4450 @node ABORT (COFF)
4451 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4452
4453 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4454 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4455 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4456
4457 @end ifset
4458
4459 @node Align
4460 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4461
4462 @cindex padding the location counter
4463 @cindex @code{align} directive
4464 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4465 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4466 required, as described below.
4467
4468 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4469 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4470 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4471 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4472 with no-op instructions.
4473
4474 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4475 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4476 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4477 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4478 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4479 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4480 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4481
4482 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4483 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4484 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4485 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4486 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4487 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4488 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4489
4490 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4491 strongarm, it is the
4492 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4493 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4494 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4495 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4496
4497 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4498 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4499 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4500 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4501 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4502
4503 @node Altmacro
4504 @section @code{.altmacro}
4505 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4506
4507 @ftable @code
4508 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4509 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4510 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4511 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4512 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4513 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4514 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4515
4516 @item String delimiters
4517 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4518 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4519
4520 @table @code
4521 @item '@var{string}'
4522 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4523
4524 @item <@var{string}>
4525 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4526 @end table
4527
4528 @item single-character string escape
4529 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4530 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4531 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4532 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4533
4534 @item Expression results as strings
4535 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4536 and use the result as a string.
4537 @end ftable
4538
4539 @node Ascii
4540 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4541
4542 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4543 @cindex string literals
4544 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4545 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4546 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4547
4548 @node Asciz
4549 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4550
4551 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4552 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4553 @cindex null-terminated strings
4554 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4555 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4556
4557 @node Balign
4558 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4559
4560 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4561 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4562 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4563 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4564 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4565 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4566 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4567
4568 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4569 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4570 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4571 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4572 with no-op instructions.
4573
4574 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4575 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4576 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4577 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4578 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4579 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4580 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4581
4582 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4583 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4584 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4585 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4586 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4587 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4588 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4589 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4590 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4591 undefined.
4592
4593 @node Bundle directives
4594 @section Bundle directives
4595 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4596 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4597 @cindex bundle
4598 @cindex instruction bundle
4599 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4600 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4601 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4602 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4603 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4604 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4605 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4606
4607 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4608 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4609 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4610 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4611 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4612 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4613 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4614 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4615 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4616 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4617 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4618
4619 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4620 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4621 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4622 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4623 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4624 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4625 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4626 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4627 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4628
4629 @cindex bundle-locked
4630 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4631 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4632 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4633 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4634 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4635 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4636 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4637 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4638 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4639 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4640 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4641 bundle size.
4642
4643 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4644 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4645 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4646 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4647 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4648 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4649
4650 @node Byte
4651 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4652
4653 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4654 @cindex integers, one byte
4655 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4656 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4657
4658 @node CFI directives
4659 @section CFI directives
4660 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4661 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4662 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4663 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4664 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4665 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4666 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4667 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4668
4669 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4670 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4671
4672 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4673 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4674
4675 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4676 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4677 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4678 redefine it will result in an error.
4679
4680 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4681 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4682 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4683 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4684 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4685 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4686
4687 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4688 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4689
4690 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4691 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4692 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4693 unwind entry previously opened by
4694 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4695
4696 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4697 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4698 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4699 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4700 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4701 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4702 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4703 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4704 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4705 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4706 no personality routine.
4707
4708 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4709 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4710 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4711 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4712 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4713 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4714
4715 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4716 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4717 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4718 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4719 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4720 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4721 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4722 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4723
4724 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4725 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4726 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4727 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4728 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4729 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4730 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4731
4732 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4733 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4734 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4735 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4736 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4737 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4738
4739 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4740 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4741 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4742 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4743 by a section directive.
4744
4745 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4746 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4747 @code{.p2align} directive.
4748
4749 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4750 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4751 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4752
4753 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4754 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4755 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4756 remains the same.
4757
4758 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4759 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4760 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4761 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4762 CFA address.
4763
4764 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4765 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4766 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4767
4768 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4769 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4770 CFA.
4771
4772 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4773 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4774
4775 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4776 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4777 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4778 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4779 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4780 code it's annotating.
4781
4782 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4783 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4784
4785 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4786 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4787 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4788 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4789
4790 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4791 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4792
4793 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4794 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4795 i.e. no restoration needed.
4796
4797 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4798 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4799 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4800 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4801 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4802 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4803 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4804
4805 @smallexample
4806 je label
4807 popq %rbx
4808 .cfi_restore %rbx
4809 popq %r12
4810 .cfi_restore %r12
4811 popq %rbp
4812 .cfi_restore %rbp
4813 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4814 ret
4815 label:
4816 /* Do something else */
4817 @end smallexample
4818
4819 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4820 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4821 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4822 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4823 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4824 we can write:
4825
4826 @smallexample
4827 je label
4828 popq %rbx
4829 .cfi_remember_state
4830 .cfi_restore %rbx
4831 popq %r12
4832 .cfi_restore %r12
4833 popq %rbp
4834 .cfi_restore %rbp
4835 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4836 ret
4837 label:
4838 .cfi_restore_state
4839 /* Do something else */
4840 @end smallexample
4841
4842 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4843 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4844 @code{.cfi} directives.
4845
4846 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4847 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4848 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4849
4850 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4851 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4852
4853 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4854 SPARC register window has been saved.
4855
4856 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4857 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4858 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4859 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4860
4861 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4862 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4863 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4864 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4865
4866 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4867 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4868 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4869 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4870 or another register.
4871
4872 @node Comm
4873 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4874
4875 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4876 @cindex symbol, common
4877 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4878 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4879 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4880 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4881 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4882 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4883 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4884 using the largest size.
4885
4886 @ifset COFF-ELF
4887 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4888 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4889 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4890 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4891 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4892 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4893 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4894 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4895 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4896 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4897 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4898 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4899 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4900 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4901 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4902 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4903 @end ifset
4904
4905 @ifset HPPA
4906 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4907 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4908 @end ifset
4909
4910 @node Data
4911 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4912 @cindex @code{data} directive
4913
4914 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4915 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4916 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4917 to zero.
4918
4919 @node Dc
4920 @section @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4921 @cindex @code{dc} directive
4922
4923 The @code{.dc} directive expects zero or more @var{expressions} separated by
4924 commas. These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
4925 current section. The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
4926 @code{.dc} directive:
4927
4928 @table @code
4929 @item @samp{.a}
4930 Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
4931 @item @samp{.b}
4932 Emits 8-bit values.
4933 @item @samp{.d}
4934 Emits double precision floating-point values.
4935 @item @samp{.l}
4936 Emits 32-bit values.
4937 @item @samp{.s}
4938 Emits single precision floating-point values.
4939 @item @samp{.w}
4940 Emits 16-bit values.
4941 Note - this is true even on targets where the @code{.word} directive would emit
4942 32-bit values.
4943 @item @samp{.x}
4944 Emits long double precision floating-point values.
4945 @end table
4946
4947 If no suffix is used then @samp{.w} is assumed.
4948
4949 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
4950 point values.
4951
4952 @node Dcb
4953 @section @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4954 @cindex @code{dcb} directive
4955 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
4956 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
4957 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
4958 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
4959
4960 @table @code
4961 @item @samp{.b}
4962 Emits single byte values.
4963 @item @samp{.d}
4964 Emits double-precision floating point values.
4965 @item @samp{.l}
4966 Emits 4-byte values.
4967 @item @samp{.s}
4968 Emits single-precision floating point values.
4969 @item @samp{.w}
4970 Emits 2-byte values.
4971 @item @samp{.x}
4972 Emits long double-precision floating point values.
4973 @end table
4974
4975 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
4976
4977 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
4978 point values.
4979
4980 @node Ds
4981 @section @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4982 @cindex @code{ds} directive
4983 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
4984 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
4985 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
4986 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
4987
4988 @table @code
4989 @item @samp{.b}
4990 Emits single byte values.
4991 @item @samp{.d}
4992 Emits 8-byte values.
4993 @item @samp{.l}
4994 Emits 4-byte values.
4995 @item @samp{.p}
4996 Emits 12-byte values.
4997 @item @samp{.s}
4998 Emits 4-byte values.
4999 @item @samp{.w}
5000 Emits 2-byte values.
5001 @item @samp{.x}
5002 Emits 12-byte values.
5003 @end table
5004
5005 Note - unlike the @code{.dcb} directive the @samp{.d}, @samp{.s} and @samp{.x}
5006 suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
5007
5008 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5009
5010 The byte ordering is target dependent.
5011
5012
5013 @ifset COFF
5014 @node Def
5015 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5016
5017 @cindex @code{def} directive
5018 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5019 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5020 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5021 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5022 @end ifset
5023
5024 @ifset aout
5025 @node Desc
5026 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5027
5028 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5029 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5030 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5031 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5032 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5033
5034 @ifset COFF
5035 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5036 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5037 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5038 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5039 @end ifset
5040 @end ifset
5041
5042 @ifset COFF
5043 @node Dim
5044 @section @code{.dim}
5045
5046 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5047 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5048 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5049 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5050 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5051 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5052 @end ifset
5053
5054 @node Double
5055 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5056
5057 @cindex @code{double} directive
5058 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5059 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5060 assembles floating point numbers.
5061 @ifset GENERIC
5062 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5063 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5064 @end ifset
5065 @ifclear GENERIC
5066 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5067 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5068 in @sc{ieee} format.
5069 @end ifset
5070 @end ifclear
5071
5072 @node Eject
5073 @section @code{.eject}
5074
5075 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5076 @cindex new page, in listings
5077 @cindex page, in listings
5078 @cindex listing control: new page
5079 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5080
5081 @node Else
5082 @section @code{.else}
5083
5084 @cindex @code{else} directive
5085 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5086 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5087 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5088 was false.
5089
5090 @node Elseif
5091 @section @code{.elseif}
5092
5093 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5094 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5095 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5096 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5097
5098 @node End
5099 @section @code{.end}
5100
5101 @cindex @code{end} directive
5102 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5103 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5104
5105 @ifset COFF
5106 @node Endef
5107 @section @code{.endef}
5108
5109 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5110 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5111 @code{.def}.
5112 @end ifset
5113
5114 @node Endfunc
5115 @section @code{.endfunc}
5116 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5117 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5118
5119 @node Endif
5120 @section @code{.endif}
5121
5122 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5123 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5124 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5125 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5126
5127 @node Equ
5128 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5129
5130 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5131 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5132 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5133 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5134 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5135
5136 @ifset HPPA
5137 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5138 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5139 @end ifset
5140
5141 @ifset Z80
5142 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5143 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5144 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5145 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5146 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5147 @end ifset
5148
5149 @node Equiv
5150 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5151 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5152 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5153 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5154 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5155 undefined.
5156
5157 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5158 @smallexample
5159 .ifdef SYM
5160 .err
5161 .endif
5162 .equ SYM,VAL
5163 @end smallexample
5164 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5165
5166 @node Eqv
5167 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5168 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5169 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5170 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5171 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5172 value is taken.
5173
5174 @node Err
5175 @section @code{.err}
5176 @cindex @code{err} directive
5177 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5178 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5179 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5180
5181 @node Error
5182 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5183 @cindex error directive
5184
5185 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5186 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5187 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5188 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5189
5190 @smallexample
5191 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5192 @end smallexample
5193
5194 @node Exitm
5195 @section @code{.exitm}
5196 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5197
5198 @node Extern
5199 @section @code{.extern}
5200
5201 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5202 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5203 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5204 all undefined symbols as external.
5205
5206 @node Fail
5207 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5208
5209 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5210 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5211 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5212 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5213 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5214 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5215
5216 @node File
5217 @section @code{.file}
5218 @cindex @code{file} directive
5219
5220 @ifclear no-file-dir
5221 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5222 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5223 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5224
5225 @subheading Default Version
5226
5227 @cindex logical file name
5228 @cindex file name, logical
5229 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5230 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5231
5232 @smallexample
5233 .file @var{string}
5234 @end smallexample
5235
5236 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5237 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5238 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5239 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5240 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5241
5242 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5243 @end ifclear
5244
5245 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5246 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5247
5248 @smallexample
5249 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5250 @end smallexample
5251
5252 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5253 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5254 literal.
5255
5256 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5257 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5258 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5259 entries will have.
5260
5261 @node Fill
5262 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5263
5264 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5265 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5266 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5267 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5268 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5269 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5270 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5271 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5272 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5273 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5274 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5275 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5276 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5277 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5278
5279 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5280 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5281 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5282 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5283
5284 @node Float
5285 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5286
5287 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5288 @cindex @code{float} directive
5289 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5290 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5291 @ifset GENERIC
5292 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5293 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5294 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5295 @end ifset
5296 @ifclear GENERIC
5297 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5298 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5299 in @sc{ieee} format.
5300 @end ifset
5301 @end ifclear
5302
5303 @node Func
5304 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5305 @cindex @code{func} directive
5306 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5307 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5308 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5309 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5310 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5311 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5312 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5313 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5314
5315 @node Global
5316 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5317
5318 @cindex @code{global} directive
5319 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5320 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5321 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5322 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5323 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5324 from another file linked into the same program.
5325
5326 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5327 compatibility with other assemblers.
5328
5329 @ifset HPPA
5330 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5331 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5332 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5333 @end ifset
5334
5335 @ifset ELF
5336 @node Gnu_attribute
5337 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5338 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5339
5340 @node Hidden
5341 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5342
5343 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5344 @cindex visibility
5345 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5346 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5347 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5348
5349 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5350 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5351 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5352 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5353 @end ifset
5354
5355 @node hword
5356 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5357
5358 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5359 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5360 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5361 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5362 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5363 a 16 bit number for each.
5364
5365 @ifset GENERIC
5366 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5367 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5368 @end ifset
5369 @ifclear GENERIC
5370 @ifset W32
5371 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5372 @end ifset
5373 @ifset W16
5374 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5375 @end ifset
5376 @end ifclear
5377
5378 @node Ident
5379 @section @code{.ident}
5380
5381 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5382
5383 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5384 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5385 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5386 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5387 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5388 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5389 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5390
5391 @node If
5392 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5393
5394 @cindex conditional assembly
5395 @cindex @code{if} directive
5396 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5397 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5398 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5399 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5400 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5401 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5402 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5403 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5404
5405 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5406 @table @code
5407 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5408 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5409 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5410 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5411 is considered to be undefined.
5412
5413 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5414 @item .ifb @var{text}
5415 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5416
5417 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5418 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5419 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5420 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5421 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5422 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5423 string comparison is case sensitive.
5424
5425 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5426 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5427 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5428
5429 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5430 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5431 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5432
5433 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5434 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5435 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5436 equal to zero.
5437
5438 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5439 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5440 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5441
5442 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5443 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5444 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5445 to zero.
5446
5447 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5448 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5449 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5450
5451 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5452 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5453 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5454 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5455
5456 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5457 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5458 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5459 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5460
5461 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5462 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5463 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5464 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5465 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5466 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5467 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5468
5469 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5470 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5471 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5472 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5473
5474 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5475 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5476 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5477 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5478 @end table
5479
5480 @node Incbin
5481 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5482
5483 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5484 @cindex binary files, including
5485 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5486 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5487 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5488 around @var{file}.
5489
5490 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5491 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5492 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5493 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5494 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5495
5496 @node Include
5497 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5498
5499 @cindex @code{include} directive
5500 @cindex supporting files, including
5501 @cindex files, including
5502 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5503 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5504 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5505 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5506 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5507 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5508 around @var{file}.
5509
5510 @node Int
5511 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5512
5513 @cindex @code{int} directive
5514 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5515 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5516 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5517 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5518 of target the assembly is for.
5519
5520 @ifclear GENERIC
5521 @ifset H8
5522 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5523 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5524 32-bit integers.
5525 @end ifset
5526 @end ifclear
5527
5528 @ifset ELF
5529 @node Internal
5530 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5531
5532 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5533 @cindex visibility
5534 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5535 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5536 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5537
5538 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5539 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5540 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5541 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5542 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5543 @end ifset
5544
5545 @node Irp
5546 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5547
5548 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5549 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5550 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5551 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5552 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5553 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5554 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5555 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5556
5557 For example, assembling
5558
5559 @example
5560 .irp param,1,2,3
5561 move d\param,sp@@-
5562 .endr
5563 @end example
5564
5565 is equivalent to assembling
5566
5567 @example
5568 move d1,sp@@-
5569 move d2,sp@@-
5570 move d3,sp@@-
5571 @end example
5572
5573 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5574
5575 @node Irpc
5576 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5577
5578 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5579 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5580 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5581 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5582 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5583 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5584 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5585 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5586
5587 For example, assembling
5588
5589 @example
5590 .irpc param,123
5591 move d\param,sp@@-
5592 .endr
5593 @end example
5594
5595 is equivalent to assembling
5596
5597 @example
5598 move d1,sp@@-
5599 move d2,sp@@-
5600 move d3,sp@@-
5601 @end example
5602
5603 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5604 at @xref{Macro}.
5605
5606 @node Lcomm
5607 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5608
5609 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5610 @cindex local common symbols
5611 @cindex symbols, local common
5612 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5613 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5614 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5615 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5616 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5617 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5618
5619 @ifset GENERIC
5620 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5621 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5622 @end ifset
5623
5624 @ifset HPPA
5625 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5626 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5627 @end ifset
5628
5629 @node Lflags
5630 @section @code{.lflags}
5631
5632 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5633 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5634 assemblers, but ignores it.
5635
5636 @ifclear no-line-dir
5637 @node Line
5638 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5639
5640 @cindex @code{line} directive
5641 @cindex logical line number
5642 @ifset aout
5643 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5644 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5645 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5646 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5647 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5648 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5649 @end ifset
5650
5651 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5652 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5653 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5654 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5655 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5656
5657 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5658 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5659 debugging.
5660 @end ifclear
5661
5662 @node Linkonce
5663 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5664 @cindex COMDAT
5665 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5666 @cindex common sections
5667 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5668 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5669 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5670 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5671 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5672 unique.
5673
5674 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5675 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5676 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5677
5678 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5679 following strings. For example:
5680 @smallexample
5681 .linkonce same_size
5682 @end smallexample
5683 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5684
5685 @table @code
5686 @item discard
5687 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5688
5689 @item one_only
5690 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5691
5692 @item same_size
5693 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5694
5695 @item same_contents
5696 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5697 @end table
5698
5699 @node List
5700 @section @code{.list}
5701
5702 @cindex @code{list} directive
5703 @cindex listing control, turning on
5704 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5705 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5706 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5707 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5708 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5709
5710 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5711 @samp{-a} command-line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5712 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5713
5714 @node Ln
5715 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5716
5717 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5718 @ifclear no-line-dir
5719 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5720 @end ifclear
5721 @ifset no-line-dir
5722 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5723 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5724 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5725 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5726 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5727 @end ifset
5728
5729 @node Loc
5730 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5731 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5732 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5733 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5734 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5735 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5736 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5737 the row is added.
5738
5739 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5740
5741 @table @code
5742 @item basic_block
5743 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5744 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5745
5746 @item prologue_end
5747 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5748 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5749
5750 @item epilogue_begin
5751 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5752 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5753
5754 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5755 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5756 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5757 either 0 or 1.
5758
5759 @item isa @var{value}
5760 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5761 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5762
5763 @item discriminator @var{value}
5764 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5765 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5766
5767 @item view @var{value}
5768 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5769 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5770 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5771 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5772 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5773 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5774 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5775 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5776 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5777 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5778 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5779
5780 @end table
5781
5782 @node Loc_mark_labels
5783 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5784 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5785 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5786 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5787 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5788 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5789 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5790 this function respectively.
5791
5792 @ifset ELF
5793 @node Local
5794 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5795
5796 @cindex @code{local} directive
5797 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5798 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5799 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5800 they will be created.
5801
5802 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5803 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5804 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5805 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5806 @end ifset
5807
5808 @node Long
5809 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5810
5811 @cindex @code{long} directive
5812 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5813
5814 @ignore
5815 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5816 @c what it really ought to do
5817 @node Lsym
5818 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5819
5820 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5821 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5822 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5823 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5824 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5825 the same as the expression value:
5826 @smallexample
5827 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5828 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5829 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5830 @end smallexample
5831 @noindent
5832 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5833 @end ignore
5834
5835 @node Macro
5836 @section @code{.macro}
5837
5838 @cindex macros
5839 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5840 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5841 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5842
5843 @example
5844 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5845 .long \from
5846 .if \to-\from
5847 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5848 .endif
5849 .endm
5850 @end example
5851
5852 @noindent
5853 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5854
5855 @example
5856 .long 0
5857 .long 1
5858 .long 2
5859 .long 3
5860 .long 4
5861 .long 5
5862 @end example
5863
5864 @ftable @code
5865 @item .macro @var{macname}
5866 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5867 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5868 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5869 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5870 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5871 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5872 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5873 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5874 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5875 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5876 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5877 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5878
5879 @table @code
5880 @item .macro comm
5881 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5882 arguments.
5883
5884 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5885 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5886 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5887 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5888 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5889
5890 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5891 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5892 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5893 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5894 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5895 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5896 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5897 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5898
5899 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5900 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5901 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5902 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5903 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5904
5905 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5906 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5907 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5908
5909 @end table
5910
5911 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5912 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5913 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5914 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5915 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5916 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5917 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5918 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5919 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5920 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5921 this macro definition:
5922
5923 @example
5924 .macro label l
5925 \l:
5926 .endm
5927 @end example
5928
5929 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5930 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5931 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5932 identifier.
5933
5934 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5935 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5936 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5937 length specifier like this:
5938
5939 @example
5940 .macro opcode base length
5941 \base.\length
5942 .endm
5943 @end example
5944
5945 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5946 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5947 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5948
5949 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5950
5951 @table @code
5952 @item Insert white space
5953 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5954 solution. eg:
5955
5956 @example
5957 .macro label l
5958 \l :
5959 .endm
5960 @end example
5961
5962 @item Use @samp{\()}
5963 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5964 the following text. eg:
5965
5966 @example
5967 .macro opcode base length
5968 \base\().\length
5969 .endm
5970 @end example
5971
5972 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5973 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5974 used as a separator. eg:
5975
5976 @example
5977 .altmacro
5978 .macro label l
5979 l&:
5980 .endm
5981 @end example
5982 @end table
5983
5984 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5985 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5986 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5987
5988 @item .endm
5989 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5990 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5991
5992 @item .exitm
5993 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5994 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5995
5996 @cindex number of macros executed
5997 @cindex macros, count executed
5998 @item \@@
5999 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6000 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6001 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6002
6003 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6004 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6005 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6006 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6007 @end ftable
6008
6009 @node MRI
6010 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6011
6012 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6013 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6014 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6015 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6016 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6017 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6018
6019 @node Noaltmacro
6020 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6021 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6022
6023 @node Nolist
6024 @section @code{.nolist}
6025
6026 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6027 @cindex listing control, turning off
6028 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6029 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6030 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6031 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6032 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6033
6034 @node Nops
6035 @section @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
6036
6037 @cindex @code{nops} directive
6038 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6039 This directive emits @var{size} bytes filled with no-op instructions.
6040 @var{size} is absolute expression, which must be a positve value.
6041 @var{control} controls how no-op instructions should be generated. If
6042 the comma and @var{control} are omitted, @var{control} is assumed to be
6043 zero.
6044
6045 Note: For Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 targets, @var{control} specifies
6046 the size limit of a no-op instruction. The valid values of @var{control}
6047 are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when tuning for
6048 older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or when
6049 tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode. When 0 is used, the no-op
6050 instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
6051
6052 @node Octa
6053 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6054
6055 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on some? Or warn?
6056 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6057 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6058 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6059 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6060 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6061
6062 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6063 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6064
6065 @node Offset
6066 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6067
6068 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6069 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6070 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6071 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6072 directive.
6073
6074 @node Org
6075 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6076
6077 @cindex @code{org} directive
6078 @cindex location counter, advancing
6079 @cindex advancing location counter
6080 @cindex current address, advancing
6081 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6082 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6083 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6084 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6085 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6086 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6087 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6088 is the same as the current subsection.
6089
6090 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6091 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6092 backwards.
6093
6094 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6095 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6096 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6097 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6098 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6099 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6100
6101 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6102 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6103 people's assemblers.
6104
6105 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6106 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6107 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6108 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6109
6110 @node P2align
6111 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6112
6113 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6114 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6115 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6116 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6117 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6118 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6119 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6120 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6121
6122 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6123 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6124 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
6125 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6126 with no-op instructions.
6127
6128 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6129 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6130 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6131 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6132 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6133 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6134 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6135
6136 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6137 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6138 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6139 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6140 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6141 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6142 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6143 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6144 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6145 undefined.
6146
6147 @ifset ELF
6148 @node PopSection
6149 @section @code{.popsection}
6150
6151 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6152 @cindex Section Stack
6153 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6154 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6155 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6156 (@pxref{Previous}).
6157
6158 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6159 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6160 stack.
6161 @end ifset
6162
6163 @ifset ELF
6164 @node Previous
6165 @section @code{.previous}
6166
6167 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6168 @cindex Section Stack
6169 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6170 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6171 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6172 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6173
6174 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6175 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6176 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6177 subsections). For example:
6178
6179 @smallexample
6180 .section A
6181 .subsection 1
6182 .word 0x1234
6183 .subsection 2
6184 .word 0x5678
6185 .previous
6186 .word 0x9abc
6187 @end smallexample
6188
6189 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6190 section A. Whilst:
6191
6192 @smallexample
6193 .section A
6194 .subsection 1
6195 # Now in section A subsection 1
6196 .word 0x1234
6197 .section B
6198 .subsection 0
6199 # Now in section B subsection 0
6200 .word 0x5678
6201 .subsection 1
6202 # Now in section B subsection 1
6203 .word 0x9abc
6204 .previous
6205 # Now in section B subsection 0
6206 .word 0xdef0
6207 @end smallexample
6208
6209 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6210 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6211
6212 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6213 the top section on the section stack.
6214 @end ifset
6215
6216 @node Print
6217 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6218
6219 @cindex @code{print} directive
6220 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6221 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6222
6223 @ifset ELF
6224 @node Protected
6225 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6226
6227 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6228 @cindex visibility
6229 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6230 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6231
6232 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6233 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6234 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6235 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6236 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6237 this.
6238 @end ifset
6239
6240 @node Psize
6241 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6242
6243 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6244 @cindex listing control: paper size
6245 @cindex paper size, for listings
6246 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6247 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6248
6249 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6250 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6251 default width is 200 columns.
6252
6253 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6254 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6255 @code{.eject}).
6256
6257 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6258 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6259
6260 @node Purgem
6261 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6262
6263 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6264 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6265 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6266
6267 @ifset ELF
6268 @node PushSection
6269 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6270
6271 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6272 @cindex Section Stack
6273 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6274 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6275 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6276 (@pxref{Previous}).
6277
6278 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6279 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6280 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6281 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6282 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6283 @end ifset
6284
6285 @node Quad
6286 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6287
6288 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6289 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6290 each bignum, it emits
6291 @ifclear bignum-16
6292 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6293 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6294 @cindex eight-byte integer
6295 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6296
6297 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6298 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6299 @end ifclear
6300 @ifset bignum-16
6301 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6302 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6303 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6304 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6305 @end ifset
6306
6307 @node Reloc
6308 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6309
6310 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6311 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6312 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6313 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6314 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6315 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6316 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6317 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6318 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6319 section.
6320
6321 @node Rept
6322 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6323
6324 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6325 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6326 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6327
6328 For example, assembling
6329
6330 @example
6331 .rept 3
6332 .long 0
6333 .endr
6334 @end example
6335
6336 is equivalent to assembling
6337
6338 @example
6339 .long 0
6340 .long 0
6341 .long 0
6342 @end example
6343
6344 A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not
6345 allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
6346
6347 @node Sbttl
6348 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6349
6350 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6351 @cindex subtitles for listings
6352 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6353 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6354 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6355
6356 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6357 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6358
6359 @ifset COFF
6360 @node Scl
6361 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6362
6363 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6364 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6365 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6366 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6367 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6368 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6369 symbolic debugging information.
6370 @end ifset
6371
6372 @ifset COFF-ELF
6373 @node Section
6374 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6375
6376 @cindex named section
6377 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6378 named @var{name}.
6379
6380 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6381 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6382 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6383
6384 @ifset COFF
6385 @ifset ELF
6386 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6387 @subheading COFF Version
6388 @end ifset
6389
6390 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6391 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6392 ways:
6393
6394 @smallexample
6395 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6396 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6397 @end smallexample
6398
6399 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6400 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6401
6402 @table @code
6403 @item b
6404 bss section (uninitialized data)
6405 @item n
6406 section is not loaded
6407 @item w
6408 writable section
6409 @item d
6410 data section
6411 @item e
6412 exclude section from linking
6413 @item r
6414 read-only section
6415 @item x
6416 executable section
6417 @item s
6418 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6419 @item a
6420 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6421 @item y
6422 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6423 @item 0-9
6424 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6425 @end table
6426
6427 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6428 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6429 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6430 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6431 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6432
6433 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6434 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6435 @end ifset
6436
6437 @ifset ELF
6438 @ifset COFF
6439 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6440 @subheading ELF Version
6441 @end ifset
6442
6443 @cindex Section Stack
6444 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6445 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6446 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6447 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6448
6449 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6450 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6451
6452 @smallexample
6453 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6454 @end smallexample
6455
6456 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6457 @kindex --sectname-subst
6458 @cindex section name substitution
6459 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6460 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6461 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6462
6463 @smallexample
6464 .macro exception_code
6465 .section %S.exception
6466 [exception code here]
6467 .previous
6468 .endm
6469
6470 .text
6471 [code]
6472 exception_code
6473 [...]
6474
6475 .section .init
6476 [init code]
6477 exception_code
6478 [...]
6479 @end smallexample
6480
6481 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6482 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6483 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6484 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6485 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6486 macros just for that purpose.
6487
6488 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6489 combination of the following characters:
6490
6491 @table @code
6492 @item a
6493 section is allocatable
6494 @item d
6495 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6496 @item e
6497 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6498 @item w
6499 section is writable
6500 @item x
6501 section is executable
6502 @item M
6503 section is mergeable
6504 @item S
6505 section contains zero terminated strings
6506 @item G
6507 section is a member of a section group
6508 @item T
6509 section is used for thread-local-storage
6510 @item ?
6511 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6512 @item @code{<number>}
6513 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6514 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6515 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6516 resulting value.
6517 @item @code{<target specific>}
6518 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6519 @end table
6520
6521 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6522 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6523 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6524 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6525 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6526 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6527
6528 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6529
6530 @table @code
6531 @item @@progbits
6532 section contains data
6533 @item @@nobits
6534 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6535 @item @@note
6536 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6537 @item @@init_array
6538 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6539 @item @@fini_array
6540 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6541 @item @@preinit_array
6542 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6543 @item @@@code{<number>}
6544 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6545 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6546 some targets extend this list with their own types
6547 @end table
6548
6549 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6550 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6551
6552 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6553 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6554 @code{%} character.
6555
6556 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6557 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6558 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6559
6560 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6561 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6562
6563 @smallexample
6564 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6565 @end smallexample
6566
6567 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6568 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6569 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6570 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6571 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6572 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6573 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6574 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6575 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6576
6577 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6578 be present along with an additional field like this:
6579
6580 @smallexample
6581 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6582 @end smallexample
6583
6584 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6585 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6586
6587 @table @code
6588 @item comdat
6589 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6590 @item .gnu.linkonce
6591 an alias for comdat
6592 @end table
6593
6594 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6595 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6596
6597 @smallexample
6598 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6599 @end smallexample
6600
6601 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6602 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6603 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6604 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6605 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6606 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6607
6608 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6609 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6610 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6611 executable. The section will contain data.
6612
6613 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6614 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6615
6616 @smallexample
6617 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6618 @end smallexample
6619
6620 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6621 separated flags:
6622
6623 @table @code
6624 @item #alloc
6625 section is allocatable
6626 @item #write
6627 section is writable
6628 @item #execinstr
6629 section is executable
6630 @item #exclude
6631 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6632 @item #tls
6633 section is used for thread local storage
6634 @end table
6635
6636 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6637 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6638 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6639 work.
6640 @end ifset
6641 @end ifset
6642
6643 @node Set
6644 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6645
6646 @cindex @code{set} directive
6647 @cindex symbol value, setting
6648 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6649 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6650 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6651 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6652
6653 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6654 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6655 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6656 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6657 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6658 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6659 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6660 different symbols.
6661
6662 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6663 file is the last value stored into it.
6664
6665 @ifset Z80
6666 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6667 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6668 @end ifset
6669
6670 @node Short
6671 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6672
6673 @cindex @code{short} directive
6674 @ifset GENERIC
6675 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6676 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6677
6678 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6679 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6680 @end ifset
6681 @ifclear GENERIC
6682 @ifset W16
6683 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6684 @end ifset
6685 @ifset W32
6686 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6687 a 16 bit number for each.
6688 @end ifset
6689 @end ifclear
6690
6691 @node Single
6692 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6693
6694 @cindex @code{single} directive
6695 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6696 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6697 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6698 @ifset GENERIC
6699 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6700 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6701 @end ifset
6702 @ifclear GENERIC
6703 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6704 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6705 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6706 @end ifset
6707 @end ifclear
6708
6709 @ifset COFF-ELF
6710 @node Size
6711 @section @code{.size}
6712
6713 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6714
6715 @ifset COFF
6716 @ifset ELF
6717 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6718 @subheading COFF Version
6719 @end ifset
6720
6721 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6722 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6723 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6724
6725 @smallexample
6726 .size @var{expression}
6727 @end smallexample
6728
6729 @end ifset
6730
6731 @ifset ELF
6732 @ifset COFF
6733 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6734 @subheading ELF Version
6735 @end ifset
6736
6737 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6738 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6739
6740 @smallexample
6741 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6742 @end smallexample
6743
6744 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6745 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6746 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6747 symbols.
6748 @end ifset
6749 @end ifset
6750
6751 @ifclear no-space-dir
6752 @node Skip
6753 @section @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6754
6755 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6756 @cindex filling memory
6757 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6758 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6759 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6760 @samp{.space}.
6761 @end ifclear
6762
6763 @node Sleb128
6764 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6765
6766 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6767 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6768 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6769 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6770
6771 @ifclear no-space-dir
6772 @node Space
6773 @section @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6774
6775 @cindex @code{space} directive
6776 @cindex filling memory
6777 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6778 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6779 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6780 as @samp{.skip}.
6781
6782 @ifset HPPA
6783 @quotation
6784 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6785 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6786 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6787 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6788 for a summary.
6789 @end quotation
6790 @end ifset
6791 @end ifclear
6792
6793 @ifset have-stabs
6794 @node Stab
6795 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6796
6797 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6798 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6799 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6800 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6801 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6802 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6803 Up to five fields are required:
6804
6805 @table @var
6806 @item string
6807 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6808 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6809 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6810 using this field.
6811
6812 @item type
6813 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6814 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6815 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6816
6817 @item other
6818 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6819 low 8 bits of this expression.
6820
6821 @item desc
6822 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6823 bits of this expression.
6824
6825 @item value
6826 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6827 @end table
6828
6829 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6830 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6831 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6832 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6833
6834 @table @code
6835 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6836 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6837
6838 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6839 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6840 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6841 strings.
6842
6843 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6844 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6845 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6846 assembled.
6847
6848 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6849 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6850 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6851
6852 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6853 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6854 All five fields are specified.
6855 @end table
6856 @end ifset
6857 @c end have-stabs
6858
6859 @node String
6860 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6861 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6862
6863 @cindex string, copying to object file
6864 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6865 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6866 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6867 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6868 @cindex @code{string} directive
6869 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6870 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6871 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6872 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6873
6874 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6875 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6876 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6877 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6878
6879 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6880 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6881 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6882 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6883
6884 Example:
6885 @smallexample
6886 .string32 "BYE"
6887 expands to:
6888 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6889 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6890 @end smallexample
6891
6892
6893 @node Struct
6894 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6895
6896 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6897 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6898 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6899 @smallexample
6900 .struct 0
6901 field1:
6902 .struct field1 + 4
6903 field2:
6904 .struct field2 + 4
6905 field3:
6906 @end smallexample
6907 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6908 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6909 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6910 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6911 before further assembly.
6912
6913 @ifset ELF
6914 @node SubSection
6915 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6916
6917 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6918 @cindex Section Stack
6919 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6920 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6921 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6922 (@pxref{Previous}).
6923
6924 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6925 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6926 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6927 @end ifset
6928
6929 @ifset ELF
6930 @node Symver
6931 @section @code{.symver}
6932 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6933 @cindex symbol versioning
6934 @cindex versions of symbols
6935 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6936 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6937 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6938 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6939 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6940 shared library.
6941
6942 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6943 @smallexample
6944 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6945 @end smallexample
6946 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6947 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6948 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6949 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6950 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6951 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6952 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6953 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6954 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6955 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6956 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6957 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6958 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6959 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6960
6961 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6962 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6963 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6964 symbol table.
6965
6966 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6967 @smallexample
6968 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6969 @end smallexample
6970 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6971 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6972 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6973 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6974
6975 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6976 @smallexample
6977 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6978 @end smallexample
6979 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6980 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6981 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6982 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6983 @end ifset
6984
6985 @ifset COFF
6986 @node Tag
6987 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6988
6989 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6990 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6991 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6992 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6993 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6994 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6995 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6996 @end ifset
6997
6998 @node Text
6999 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7000
7001 @cindex @code{text} directive
7002 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7003 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7004 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7005 is used.
7006
7007 @node Title
7008 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7009
7010 @cindex @code{title} directive
7011 @cindex listing control: title line
7012 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7013 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7014
7015 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7016 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7017
7018 @ifset COFF-ELF
7019 @node Type
7020 @section @code{.type}
7021
7022 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7023
7024 @ifset COFF
7025 @ifset ELF
7026 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7027 @subheading COFF Version
7028 @end ifset
7029
7030 @cindex COFF symbol type
7031 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7032 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7033 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7034 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7035
7036 @smallexample
7037 .type @var{int}
7038 @end smallexample
7039
7040 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7041 entry.
7042
7043 @end ifset
7044
7045 @ifset ELF
7046 @ifset COFF
7047 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7048 @subheading ELF Version
7049 @end ifset
7050
7051 @cindex ELF symbol type
7052 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7053 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7054 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7055
7056 @smallexample
7057 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7058 @end smallexample
7059
7060 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7061 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7062 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7063 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7064
7065 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7066 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7067 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7068 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7069 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7070 assemblers.
7071
7072 The syntaxes supported are:
7073
7074 @smallexample
7075 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7076 .type <name>,#<type>
7077 .type <name>,@@<type>
7078 .type <name>,%<type>
7079 .type <name>,"<type>"
7080 @end smallexample
7081
7082 The types supported are:
7083
7084 @table @gcctabopt
7085 @item STT_FUNC
7086 @itemx function
7087 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7088
7089 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7090 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7091 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7092 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7093
7094 @item STT_OBJECT
7095 @itemx object
7096 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7097
7098 @item STT_TLS
7099 @itemx tls_object
7100 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7101
7102 @item STT_COMMON
7103 @itemx common
7104 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7105
7106 @item STT_NOTYPE
7107 @itemx notype
7108 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7109
7110 @item gnu_unique_object
7111 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7112 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7113 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7114 systems).
7115
7116 @end table
7117
7118 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7119
7120 @end ifset
7121 @end ifset
7122
7123 @node Uleb128
7124 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7125
7126 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7127 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7128 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7129 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7130
7131 @ifset COFF
7132 @node Val
7133 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7134
7135 @cindex @code{val} directive
7136 @cindex COFF value attribute
7137 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7138 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7139 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7140 entry.
7141 @end ifset
7142
7143 @ifset ELF
7144 @node Version
7145 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7146
7147 @cindex @code{version} directive
7148 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7149 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7150 @end ifset
7151
7152 @ifset ELF
7153 @node VTableEntry
7154 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7155
7156 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7157 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7158 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7159
7160 @node VTableInherit
7161 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7162
7163 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7164 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7165 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7166 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7167 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7168 @end ifset
7169
7170 @node Warning
7171 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7172 @cindex warning directive
7173 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7174 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7175
7176 @node Weak
7177 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7178
7179 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7180 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7181 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7182
7183 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7184 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7185 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7186
7187 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7188 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7189 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7190
7191 @node Weakref
7192 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7193
7194 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7195 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7196 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7197 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7198 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7199 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7200
7201 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7202 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7203 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7204 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7205 had the references to the alias removed.
7206
7207 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7208 within the assembler.
7209
7210 @node Word
7211 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7212
7213 @cindex @code{word} directive
7214 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7215 separated by commas.
7216 @ifclear GENERIC
7217 @ifset W32
7218 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7219 @end ifset
7220 @ifset W16
7221 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7222 @end ifset
7223 @end ifclear
7224 @ifset GENERIC
7225
7226 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7227 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7228 @end ifset
7229
7230 @c on sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7231 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7232 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7233 @cindex difference tables altered
7234 @cindex altered difference tables
7235 @quotation
7236 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7237 @end quotation
7238
7239 @ifset GENERIC
7240 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7241 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7242 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7243 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7244
7245 @end ifset
7246 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7247 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7248 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7249 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7250 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7251 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7252 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7253 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7254 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7255 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7256 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7257 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7258 @code{sym2}.
7259
7260 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7261 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7262 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7263 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7264 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7265 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7266 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7267
7268 @ifset INTERNALS
7269 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7270 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7271 assembly language programmers.
7272 @end ifset
7273 @end ifset
7274 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7275
7276 @ifclear no-space-dir
7277 @node Zero
7278 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7279
7280 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7281 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7282 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7283 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7284 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7285 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7286 @end ifclear
7287
7288 @ifset ELF
7289 @node 2byte
7290 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7291 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7292 @cindex two-byte integer
7293 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7294
7295 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7296 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7297 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7298 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7299 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7300 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7301 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7302 value at link time.
7303
7304 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7305 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7306 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7307
7308 This directive is only available for ELF targets,
7309
7310 @node 4byte
7311 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7312 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7313 @cindex four-byte integer
7314 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7315
7316 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7317 long values into the output.
7318
7319 @node 8byte
7320 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7321 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7322 @cindex eight-byte integer
7323 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7324
7325 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7326 byte long bignum values into the output.
7327
7328 @end ifset
7329
7330 @node Deprecated
7331 @section Deprecated Directives
7332
7333 @cindex deprecated directives
7334 @cindex obsolescent directives
7335 One day these directives won't work.
7336 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7337 @table @t
7338 @item .abort
7339 @item .line
7340 @end table
7341
7342 @ifset ELF
7343 @node Object Attributes
7344 @chapter Object Attributes
7345 @cindex object attributes
7346
7347 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7348 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7349 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7350 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7351 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7352 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7353 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7354 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7355 newer generation at run-time.
7356
7357 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7358 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7359 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7360 correctly.
7361
7362 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7363 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7364 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7365 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7366 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7367 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7368
7369 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7370 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7371
7372 @menu
7373 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7374 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7375 @end menu
7376
7377 @node GNU Object Attributes
7378 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7379
7380 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7381 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7382
7383 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7384 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7385 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7386 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7387 architecture-dependent ones.
7388
7389 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7390
7391 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7392
7393 @table @r
7394 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7395 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7396 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7397 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7398 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7399 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7400 @end table
7401
7402 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7403
7404 @table @r
7405 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7406 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7407
7408 @itemize @bullet
7409 @item
7410 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7411 @item
7412 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7413 double-precision FPU.
7414 @item
7415 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7416 @item
7417 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7418 @item
7419 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7420 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7421 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7422 @item
7423 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7424 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7425 general-purpose registers.
7426 @item
7427 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7428 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7429 @item
7430 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7431 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7432 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7433 @end itemize
7434 @end table
7435
7436 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7437
7438 @table @r
7439 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7440 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7441
7442 @itemize @bullet
7443 @item
7444 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7445 @item
7446 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7447 @item
7448 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7449 @item
7450 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7451 @end itemize
7452
7453 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7454 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7455
7456 @itemize @bullet
7457 @item
7458 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7459 @item
7460 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7461 @item
7462 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7463 @item
7464 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7465 @end itemize
7466 @end table
7467
7468 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7469
7470 @table @r
7471 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7472 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7473
7474 @itemize @bullet
7475 @item
7476 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7477 @item
7478 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7479 @item
7480 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7481 @end itemize
7482 @end table
7483
7484 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7485 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7486
7487 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7488 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7489 mailing list.
7490
7491 @itemize @bullet
7492 @item
7493 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7494 @item
7495 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7496 @item
7497 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7498 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7499 @item
7500 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7501 @item
7502 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7503 @item
7504 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7505 @end itemize
7506
7507 @end ifset
7508
7509 @ifset GENERIC
7510 @node Machine Dependencies
7511 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7512
7513 @cindex machine dependencies
7514 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7515 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7516 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7517 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7518 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7519 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7520 optimization.
7521
7522 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7523 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7524 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7525
7526 @menu
7527 @ifset AARCH64
7528 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7529 @end ifset
7530 @ifset ALPHA
7531 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7532 @end ifset
7533 @ifset ARC
7534 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7535 @end ifset
7536 @ifset ARM
7537 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7538 @end ifset
7539 @ifset AVR
7540 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7541 @end ifset
7542 @ifset Blackfin
7543 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7544 @end ifset
7545 @ifset CR16
7546 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7547 @end ifset
7548 @ifset CRIS
7549 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7550 @end ifset
7551 @ifset D10V
7552 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7553 @end ifset
7554 @ifset D30V
7555 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7556 @end ifset
7557 @ifset EPIPHANY
7558 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7559 @end ifset
7560 @ifset H8/300
7561 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7562 @end ifset
7563 @ifset HPPA
7564 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7565 @end ifset
7566 @ifset I80386
7567 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7568 @end ifset
7569 @ifset IA64
7570 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7571 @end ifset
7572 @ifset IP2K
7573 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7574 @end ifset
7575 @ifset LM32
7576 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7577 @end ifset
7578 @ifset M32C
7579 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7580 @end ifset
7581 @ifset M32R
7582 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7583 @end ifset
7584 @ifset M680X0
7585 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7586 @end ifset
7587 @ifset M68HC11
7588 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7589 @end ifset
7590 @ifset S12Z
7591 * S12Z-Dependent:: S12Z Dependent Features
7592 @end ifset
7593 @ifset METAG
7594 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7595 @end ifset
7596 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7597 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7598 @end ifset
7599 @ifset MIPS
7600 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7601 @end ifset
7602 @ifset MMIX
7603 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7604 @end ifset
7605 @ifset MSP430
7606 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7607 @end ifset
7608 @ifset NDS32
7609 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7610 @end ifset
7611 @ifset NIOSII
7612 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7613 @end ifset
7614 @ifset NS32K
7615 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7616 @end ifset
7617 @ifset PDP11
7618 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7619 @end ifset
7620 @ifset PJ
7621 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7622 @end ifset
7623 @ifset PPC
7624 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7625 @end ifset
7626 @ifset PRU
7627 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7628 @end ifset
7629 @ifset RISCV
7630 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7631 @end ifset
7632 @ifset RL78
7633 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7634 @end ifset
7635 @ifset RX
7636 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7637 @end ifset
7638 @ifset S390
7639 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7640 @end ifset
7641 @ifset SCORE
7642 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7643 @end ifset
7644 @ifset SH
7645 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7646 @end ifset
7647 @ifset SPARC
7648 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7649 @end ifset
7650 @ifset TIC54X
7651 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7652 @end ifset
7653 @ifset TIC6X
7654 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7655 @end ifset
7656 @ifset TILEGX
7657 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7658 @end ifset
7659 @ifset TILEPRO
7660 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7661 @end ifset
7662 @ifset V850
7663 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7664 @end ifset
7665 @ifset VAX
7666 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7667 @end ifset
7668 @ifset VISIUM
7669 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7670 @end ifset
7671 @ifset WASM32
7672 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7673 @end ifset
7674 @ifset XGATE
7675 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7676 @end ifset
7677 @ifset XSTORMY16
7678 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7679 @end ifset
7680 @ifset XTENSA
7681 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7682 @end ifset
7683 @ifset Z80
7684 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7685 @end ifset
7686 @ifset Z8000
7687 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7688 @end ifset
7689 @end menu
7690
7691 @lowersections
7692 @end ifset
7693
7694 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7695 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7696 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7697 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7698 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7699 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7700 @c in both conditional blocks.
7701
7702 @ifset AARCH64
7703 @include c-aarch64.texi
7704 @end ifset
7705
7706 @ifset ALPHA
7707 @include c-alpha.texi
7708 @end ifset
7709
7710 @ifset ARC
7711 @include c-arc.texi
7712 @end ifset
7713
7714 @ifset ARM
7715 @include c-arm.texi
7716 @end ifset
7717
7718 @ifset AVR
7719 @include c-avr.texi
7720 @end ifset
7721
7722 @ifset Blackfin
7723 @include c-bfin.texi
7724 @end ifset
7725
7726 @ifset CR16
7727 @include c-cr16.texi
7728 @end ifset
7729
7730 @ifset CRIS
7731 @include c-cris.texi
7732 @end ifset
7733
7734 @ifset Renesas-all
7735 @ifclear GENERIC
7736 @node Machine Dependencies
7737 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7738
7739 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7740 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7741 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7742 family.
7743
7744 @menu
7745 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7746 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7747 @end menu
7748 @lowersections
7749 @end ifclear
7750 @end ifset
7751
7752 @ifset D10V
7753 @include c-d10v.texi
7754 @end ifset
7755
7756 @ifset D30V
7757 @include c-d30v.texi
7758 @end ifset
7759
7760 @ifset EPIPHANY
7761 @include c-epiphany.texi
7762 @end ifset
7763
7764 @ifset H8/300
7765 @include c-h8300.texi
7766 @end ifset
7767
7768 @ifset HPPA
7769 @include c-hppa.texi
7770 @end ifset
7771
7772 @ifset I80386
7773 @include c-i386.texi
7774 @end ifset
7775
7776 @ifset IA64
7777 @include c-ia64.texi
7778 @end ifset
7779
7780 @ifset IP2K
7781 @include c-ip2k.texi
7782 @end ifset
7783
7784 @ifset LM32
7785 @include c-lm32.texi
7786 @end ifset
7787
7788 @ifset M32C
7789 @include c-m32c.texi
7790 @end ifset
7791
7792 @ifset M32R
7793 @include c-m32r.texi
7794 @end ifset
7795
7796 @ifset M680X0
7797 @include c-m68k.texi
7798 @end ifset
7799
7800 @ifset M68HC11
7801 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7802 @end ifset
7803
7804 @ifset S12Z
7805 @include c-s12z.texi
7806 @end ifset
7807
7808 @ifset METAG
7809 @include c-metag.texi
7810 @end ifset
7811
7812 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7813 @include c-microblaze.texi
7814 @end ifset
7815
7816 @ifset MIPS
7817 @include c-mips.texi
7818 @end ifset
7819
7820 @ifset MMIX
7821 @include c-mmix.texi
7822 @end ifset
7823
7824 @ifset MSP430
7825 @include c-msp430.texi
7826 @end ifset
7827
7828 @ifset NDS32
7829 @include c-nds32.texi
7830 @end ifset
7831
7832 @ifset NIOSII
7833 @include c-nios2.texi
7834 @end ifset
7835
7836 @ifset NS32K
7837 @include c-ns32k.texi
7838 @end ifset
7839
7840 @ifset PDP11
7841 @include c-pdp11.texi
7842 @end ifset
7843
7844 @ifset PJ
7845 @include c-pj.texi
7846 @end ifset
7847
7848 @ifset PPC
7849 @include c-ppc.texi
7850 @end ifset
7851
7852 @ifset PRU
7853 @include c-pru.texi
7854 @end ifset
7855
7856 @ifset RISCV
7857 @include c-riscv.texi
7858 @end ifset
7859
7860 @ifset RL78
7861 @include c-rl78.texi
7862 @end ifset
7863
7864 @ifset RX
7865 @include c-rx.texi
7866 @end ifset
7867
7868 @ifset S390
7869 @include c-s390.texi
7870 @end ifset
7871
7872 @ifset SCORE
7873 @include c-score.texi
7874 @end ifset
7875
7876 @ifset SH
7877 @include c-sh.texi
7878 @end ifset
7879
7880 @ifset SPARC
7881 @include c-sparc.texi
7882 @end ifset
7883
7884 @ifset TIC54X
7885 @include c-tic54x.texi
7886 @end ifset
7887
7888 @ifset TIC6X
7889 @include c-tic6x.texi
7890 @end ifset
7891
7892 @ifset TILEGX
7893 @include c-tilegx.texi
7894 @end ifset
7895
7896 @ifset TILEPRO
7897 @include c-tilepro.texi
7898 @end ifset
7899
7900 @ifset V850
7901 @include c-v850.texi
7902 @end ifset
7903
7904 @ifset VAX
7905 @include c-vax.texi
7906 @end ifset
7907
7908 @ifset VISIUM
7909 @include c-visium.texi
7910 @end ifset
7911
7912 @ifset WASM32
7913 @include c-wasm32.texi
7914 @end ifset
7915
7916 @ifset XGATE
7917 @include c-xgate.texi
7918 @end ifset
7919
7920 @ifset XSTORMY16
7921 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7922 @end ifset
7923
7924 @ifset XTENSA
7925 @include c-xtensa.texi
7926 @end ifset
7927
7928 @ifset Z80
7929 @include c-z80.texi
7930 @end ifset
7931
7932 @ifset Z8000
7933 @include c-z8k.texi
7934 @end ifset
7935
7936 @ifset GENERIC
7937 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7938 @raisesections
7939 @end ifset
7940
7941 @node Reporting Bugs
7942 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7943 @cindex bugs in assembler
7944 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7945
7946 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7947
7948 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7949 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7950 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7951 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7952
7953 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7954 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7955
7956 @menu
7957 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7958 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7959 @end menu
7960
7961 @node Bug Criteria
7962 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7963 @cindex bug criteria
7964
7965 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7966
7967 @itemize @bullet
7968 @cindex fatal signal
7969 @cindex assembler crash
7970 @cindex crash of assembler
7971 @item
7972 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7973 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7974
7975 @cindex error on valid input
7976 @item
7977 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7978
7979 @cindex invalid input
7980 @item
7981 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7982 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7983 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7984
7985 @item
7986 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7987 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7988 @end itemize
7989
7990 @node Bug Reporting
7991 @section How to Report Bugs
7992 @cindex bug reports
7993 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7994
7995 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7996 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7997 contact that organization first.
7998
7999 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8000 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8001 distribution.
8002
8003 @ifset BUGURL
8004 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8005 to @value{BUGURL}.
8006 @end ifset
8007
8008 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8009 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8010 fact or leave it out, state it!
8011
8012 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8013 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8014 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8015 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8016 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8017 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8018 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8019 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8020 and the most helpful.
8021
8022 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8023 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8024 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8025
8026 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8027 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8028 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8029 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8030
8031 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8032
8033 @itemize @bullet
8034 @item
8035 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8036 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8037
8038 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8039 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8040
8041 @item
8042 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8043
8044 @item
8045 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8046 version number.
8047
8048 @item
8049 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8050 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8051
8052 @item
8053 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8054 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8055 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8056
8057 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8058 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8059
8060 @item
8061 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8062 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8063 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8064 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8065 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8066 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8067 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8068
8069 @item
8070 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8071 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8072
8073 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8074 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8075 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8076 make a mistake.
8077
8078 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8079 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8080 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8081 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8082 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8083 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8084 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8085 observations.
8086
8087 @item
8088 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8089 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8090 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8091 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8092 by line number.
8093
8094 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8095 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8096 @end itemize
8097
8098 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8099
8100 @itemize @bullet
8101 @item
8102 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8103
8104 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8105 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8106 changes will not affect it.
8107
8108 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8109 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8110 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8111 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8112
8113 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8114 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8115 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8116 less time, and so on.
8117
8118 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8119 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8120
8121 @item
8122 A patch for the bug.
8123
8124 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8125 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8126 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8127 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8128
8129 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8130 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8131 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8132 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8133
8134 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8135 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8136 help us to understand.
8137
8138 @item
8139 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8140
8141 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8142 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8143 @end itemize
8144
8145 @node Acknowledgements
8146 @chapter Acknowledgements
8147
8148 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8149 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8150 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8151 @c (October 2012),
8152 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8153
8154 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8155 more details?}
8156
8157 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8158 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8159 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8160
8161 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8162 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8163 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8164 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8165 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8166 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8167 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8168 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8169 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8170 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8171
8172 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8173 in format-specific I/O modules.
8174
8175 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8176 has done much work with it since.
8177
8178 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8179
8180 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8181
8182 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8183 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8184
8185 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8186 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8187 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8188 support a.out format.
8189
8190 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8191 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8192 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8193 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8194 targets.
8195
8196 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8197 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8198 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8199 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8200 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8201 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8202 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8203
8204 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8205 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8206 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8207 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8208
8209 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8210
8211 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8212
8213 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8214 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8215 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8216 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8217
8218 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8219 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8220 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8221 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8222 and some initial 64-bit support).
8223
8224 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8225
8226 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8227 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8228
8229 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8230 flavors.
8231
8232 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8233 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8234
8235 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8236 configuration enhancements.
8237
8238 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8239
8240 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8241 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8242 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8243 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8244
8245 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8246 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8247 @include fdl.texi
8248
8249 @node AS Index
8250 @unnumbered AS Index
8251
8252 @printindex cp
8253
8254 @bye
8255 @c Local Variables:
8256 @c fill-column: 79
8257 @c End:
This page took 0.250641 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.